Sie sind auf Seite 1von 207

GSM/EDGE RAN - BR line

Install and commission


Base transceiver station equipment
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631


2 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d8058071bc04
The information in this document is subject to change without notice and describes only the
product defined in the introduction of this documentation. This documentation is intended for the
use of Nokia Siemens Networks customers only for the purposes of the agreement under which
the document is submitted, and no part of it may be used, reproduced, modified or transmitted
in any form or means without the prior written permission of Nokia Siemens Networks. The
documentation has been prepared to be used by professional and properly trained personnel,
and the customer assumes full responsibility when using it. Nokia Siemens Networks welcomes
customer comments as part of the process of continuous development and improvement of the
documentation.
The information or statements given in this documentation concerning the suitability, capacity,
or performance of the mentioned hardware or software products are given "as is" and all liability
arising in connection with such hardware or software products shall be defined conclusively and
finally in a separate agreement between Nokia Siemens Networks and the customer. However,
Nokia Siemens Networks has made all reasonable efforts to ensure that the instructions
contained in the document are adequate and free of material errors and omissions. Nokia
Siemens Networks will, if deemed necessary by Nokia Siemens Networks, explain issues which
may not be covered by the document.
Nokia Siemens Networks will correct errors in this documentation as soon as possible. IN NO
EVENT WILL Nokia Siemens Networks BE LIABLE FOR ERRORS IN THIS DOCUMENTA-
TION OR FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDI-
RECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL OR ANY LOSSES, SUCH AS BUT NOT LIMITED
TO LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, BUSINESS OPPORTUNITY
OR DATA,THAT MAY ARISE FROM THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENT OR THE INFORMATION
IN IT.
This documentation and the product it describes are considered protected by copyrights and
other intellectual property rights according to the applicable laws.
The wave logo is a trademark of Nokia Siemens Networks Oy. Nokia is a registered trademark
of Nokia Corporation. Siemens is a registered trademark of Siemens AG.
Other product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks of their respective
owners, and they are mentioned for identification purposes only.
Copyright Nokia Siemens Networks 2010. All rights reserved
f Important Notice on Product Safety
Elevated voltages are inevitably present at specific points in this electrical equipment.
Some of the parts may also have elevated operating temperatures.
Non-observance of these conditions and the safety instructions can result in personal
injury or in property damage.
Therefore, only trained and qualified personnel may install and maintain the system.
The system complies with the standard EN 60950 / IEC 60950. All equipment connected
has to comply with the applicable safety standards.
The same text in German:
Wichtiger Hinweis zur Produktsicherheit
In elektrischen Anlagen stehen zwangslufig bestimmte Teile der Gerte unter Span-
nung. Einige Teile knnen auch eine hohe Betriebstemperatur aufweisen.
Eine Nichtbeachtung dieser Situation und der Warnungshinweise kann zu Krperverlet-
zungen und Sachschden fhren.
Deshalb wird vorausgesetzt, dass nur geschultes und qualifiziertes Personal die
Anlagen installiert und wartet.
Das System entspricht den Anforderungen der EN 60950 / IEC 60950. Angeschlossene
Gerte mssen die zutreffenden Sicherheitsbestimmungen erfllen.
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

3
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d8058071bc04
Table of Contents
This document has 207 pages.
Reason for Update. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.1 Purpose of the manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.2 Installation prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.3 Handling of the modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2 Shelter installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.1 Position in the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.2 Site requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.3 Environmental conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.4 Site configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.5 Construction view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.5.1 Functional units and modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.5.2 Site with BS-241 shelters (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.5.3 Site with BS-241 II shelters (example). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.5.4 Site with BS-241 IIB shelters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.6 Equipment delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2.6.1 Preliminary checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.6.2 Unpacking the shelter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.6.3 Transport with crane or helicopter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.6.3.1 Transport of BS-241 shelters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.6.3.2 Transport of BS-241 II shelters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
2.6.4 Unpacking of modules and batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2.7 Fixing of the shelters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2.7.1 Mounting on concrete foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2.7.2 Mounting with mounting frames. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
2.8 Mechanical connections between the shelters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
2.8.1 EMC/IP connection between HEX-shelters (BS-241 only) . . . . . . . . . . 39
2.8.2 EMC/IP connection between MEF-shelters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
2.8.2.1 EMC/IP connection between BS-241 MEF-shelters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
2.8.2.2 EMC/IP connection between BS-241 II shelters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
2.8.2.3 EMC/IP connection of the BS-241 with BS-241 II shelters . . . . . . . . . . 46
2.8.3 Connection between different shelter types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
3 External cabling activities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
3.1 Ground connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
3.2 AC supply connection (3-phase) BS-241 / 241 II. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
3.2.1 AC supply connection (variant 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3.2.2 AC supply connection (variant 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
3.3 AC supply connection (single phase) BS-241 II. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
3.4 AC supplied BS-241 IIB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
3.5 DC supplied BS-241 II (BS-241 II DC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
3.6 DC supplied BS-241 IIB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
3.7 Abis-interface - PCM link terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
3.7.1 Abis-interface for 120 Ohm cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
4 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d8058071bc04
3.7.2 Abis-interface for 75 Ohm cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
3.7.3 Monitoring interfaces of OVPT / ABISCON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
3.7.4 Abis-interface with ETHCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
3.7.5 Abis-interface without OVPT / ABISCON / ETHCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
3.8 Connection of external alarm sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
3.8.1 Connection of external alarm sensors at ACTM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
3.8.2 Connection of external alarm sensors at ACTM24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
3.9 Installation of the MK:OPEXAL8V1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
3.10 Installation of the MK:OPEXAL10V1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
3.11 Alarm collection terminal ACTC - internal alarms / DC supply . . . . . . . . 87
3.12 Alarm collection terminal ACTC-3 - internal alarms / DC supply . . . . . . 89
3.13 Alarm collection terminal ACTC-4 - internal alarms / DC supply . . . . . . 91
3.14 Alarm collection terminal ACTCS - internal alarms / DC supply . . . . . . . 93
3.15 Local maintenance terminal (LMT) interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
3.16 Antenna connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
3.16.1 Preparation of antenna jumper cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
3.17 Installation of tower mounted amplifiers (TMA). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
3.17.1 Installation of the TMADV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
3.17.2 Installation of the STMAx / DTMAx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
3.17.3 Installation of the MHA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
4 Shelter completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
4.1 Backup batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
4.1.1 Installation of batteries in BS-241 Service shelter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
4.1.1.1 Installation of battery type Excide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
4.1.1.2 Installation of battery type Oerlikon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
4.1.1.3 Installation of battery type EnerSys / Hawker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
4.1.2 Installation of batteries in BS-241 II Service shelters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
4.1.2.1 Installation example with battery type EnerSys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
4.1.3 Battery breaker alarm connections BS-241 / BS-241 II . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
4.1.4 Installation of batteries in BS-241 II Service1B shelter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
4.1.5 Battery breaker alarm connections of the Service1B shelter . . . . . . . . 135
4.1.6 Placement of the temperatur sensor of Service1B shelter . . . . . . . . . . 136
4.2 Installation of link equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
4.2.1 Installation of microwave equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
4.2.2 Installation of the NTPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
4.3 Cable connections between the shelters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
4.3.1 CAN- Bus connections (BS-241 / 241 II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
4.3.2 SELIC-cabling between the shelters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
4.3.3 - 48 V DC connections (BS-241). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
4.3.4 - 48 V DC connections (BS-241 II, AC supplied only) with ADPA . . . . 154
4.3.5 - 48 V DC connections (BS-241 II, AC supplied only) with ADP-2V1 . . 157
4.3.6 230 V AC connections (BS-241) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
4.3.7 230 V AC connections (BS-241 II, AC supplied only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
4.3.8 Battery cabling between the shelters (BS-241). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
4.3.9 Battery cabling, BS-241 II with ADPA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
4.3.10 Battery cabling, BS-241 II with ADP-2V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
4.4 Extension of BS-241 with BS-241 II shelters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

5
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d8058071bc04
4.4.1 -48 V DC connections between the shelters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
4.4.2 230 V AC connections between the shelters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
4.4.3 Battery cabling between the shelters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
4.5 Cabling between BS-241 IIB shelters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
4.5.1 ALARM-cabling between BS-241 IIB shelters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
4.5.2 DC-cabling between BS-241 IIB shelters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
4.5.3 CAN-BUS / CC-Link cabling between BS-241 IIB shelters . . . . . . . . . 180
4.6 Cabling between BS-241/241II and BS-241IIB shelters . . . . . . . . . . . 181
4.7 Cabling between BS-241II S1B shelters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
4.8 Cover parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
5 Nonstandard installation works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
5.1 Installation of the modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
5.2 Nonstandard installation works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
5.2.1 Installation of the AC/DC frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
5.2.2 Battery-upgrade of BS-241 Service shelters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
5.3 Setup of system cabling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
5.3.1 System cabling with semi-rigid cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
5.3.2 System cabling with flexible cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
5.3.3 Termination resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
6 Post installation notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
6.1 Leaving the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
6.2 Disposal of electrical and electronic equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
7 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
7.1 Installation tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
7.2 Ancillary material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
7.3 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
7.4 Checklist for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
6 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d8058071bc04
List of Figures
Figure 1 ESD Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Figure 2 Socket for wrist strap connection (BS-241). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Figure 3 Press-stud for ESD wrist strap connection (BS-241 II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Figure 4 Position of the base station within the SBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Figure 5 Typical BS-241 site (example with BS-241 II shelters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Figure 6 16-carrier site with BS-241 shelters (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Figure 7 16-carrier site with BS-241 II shelters (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Figure 8 16-carrier site with BS-241 IIB shelters (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Figure 9 Shockwatch
TM
-label and TIP (N) TELL
TM
-label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Figure 10 Opening of the shelter door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Figure 11 Removal of the roof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Figure 12 Mounting of the crane eye bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Figure 13 Guideline for crane transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Figure 14 Mounting of crane eye bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Figure 15 Guideline for crane transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Figure 16 Unpacking of the battery sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Figure 17 Foundation design for BS-241 / 241 II shelter (proposal) . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Figure 18 Drilling template of the BS-241 / 241 II plinth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Figure 19 Fixing of BS-241 II shelters onto a concrete foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Figure 20 Mounting frames and configuration example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Figure 21 Minimum floorspace for BS-241 / 241 II installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Figure 22 Assembly of the connection kit for BS-241 HEX-shelters . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Figure 23 Parts of the EMCIP connection kit S30861-K2073-X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Figure 24 Parts of the EMCIP connection kit S30861-K4148-X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Figure 25 Opening of the shelters inter-connection hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Figure 26 Setup of the EMC/IP sealing ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Figure 27 Preparation of the plinth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Figure 28 Bracket inside the shelter plinth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Figure 29 Mounting of the ground angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Figure 30 Opening of the shelter interconnection hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Figure 31 Preparation for mounting of the bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Figure 32 Mounting of the bracket inside the plinth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Figure 33 Ground connection between BS-241 II shelters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Figure 34 Drilling sketch for the plinth of HEX-shelter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Figure 35 Removal of plinth front covers BS-241 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Figure 36 Removal of plinth front cover BS-241 II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Figure 37 Disconnection of the ground wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Figure 38 Opening of the cable feeding module of BS-241 (1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Figure 39 Opening of the cable feeding module of BS-241 (2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Figure 40 Opening of the cable feeding module of BS-241 II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Figure 41 Cable routing at the cable feeding module BS-241 II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Figure 42 Connection of the ground wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Figure 43 AC mains and ground connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Figure 44 Wiring of the MSU:AC terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Figure 45 Terminal assignment of the MSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

7
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d8058071bc04
Figure 46 AC mains connections, BS-241 II, single phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Figure 47 Terminal assignment of the MSU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Figure 48 Terminal assignment of the MSU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Figure 49 Routing of the AC supply cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Figure 50 Overview of the DC supply and ground connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Figure 51 Wiring of the MSU:DC terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Figure 52 Temperature management board (TMB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Figure 53 Terminals for connection of the DC supply cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Figure 54 Preparation of the PCM-cable, 120 impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Figure 55 Access to the Abis interfaces (BS-241) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Figure 56 Access to the Abis interfaces (BS-241 II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Figure 57 Connection of the PCM-cable (OVPT for 120 Ohm impedance) . . . . . . 66
Figure 58 Wiring of the Abis interface PCM 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Figure 59 Wiring of the Abis interface PCM 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Figure 60 Connection of external PCM cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Figure 61 OVPT with 1.0/2.3 connectors (75 ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Figure 62 Monitoring interfaces for PCM lines of OVPT / ABISCON. . . . . . . . . . . 69
Figure 63 Connector arrangement of the ETHCON module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Figure 64 ETHCON module, mounted inside the shelters plinth. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Figure 65 ETHCON, external clock connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Figure 66 ETHCON trace adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Figure 67 Location of the ACTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Figure 68 ACTM in connection position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Figure 69 Terminal numbering of ACTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Figure 70 Terminal numbering of the ACTM24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Figure 71 Contents of the MK:OPEXAL8V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Figure 72 OPEXAL8V1 in mounted position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Figure 73 Extension of the MK:OPEXAL8V1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Figure 74 Assembly Guideline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Figure 75 ACTM, connection of the cables from OPEXAL10V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Figure 76 Connector assignment of the OPEXAL10V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Figure 77 Label with terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Figure 78 Connector arrangement at ACTC (BS-241). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Figure 79 Connector arrangement at the ACTC-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Figure 80 Connector arrangement at the ACTC-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Figure 81 Jumper settings on the top side of the PCB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Figure 82 Connector arrangement of the ACTCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Figure 83 Location of the LMT interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Figure 84 Cell numbering (top view from the antenna pole) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Figure 85 Tools for jumper fabrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Figure 86 Parts of the connector unit kit (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Figure 87 Using the trimming tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Figure 88 Removal of isolation and deburring of inner conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Figure 89 Removal of metal particles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Figure 90 Assembly of the connector unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Figure 91 Fixing of connector unit, removal of outer insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Figure 92 Handling of heat protection tape and shrink sleeve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
8 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d8058071bc04
Figure 93 Shrinkage and removal of the visible heat protection tape . . . . . . . . . . 101
Figure 94 Max. dimensions of antenna connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Figure 95 Opening of the cable feeding module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Figure 96 Antenna jumpers at the cable feeding module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Figure 97 Position of TMA (DUAMCO combiner used). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Figure 98 Position of TMA (FICOM combiner used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Figure 99 Configuration with HPDU, DUBIAS and TMA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Figure 100 Installation of TMA and DUBIAS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Figure 101 Bottom view of the TMADV1 (Single TMA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Figure 102 TMA with mounting brackets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Figure 103 Example of STMAx and DTMAx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Figure 104 Rear side of STMAx and DTMAx (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Figure 105 Example of pole mounting with the STMAx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Figure 106 Example of pole mounting with the STMAx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Figure 107 Switch OFF the breakers for battery installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Figure 108 Battery tray with backup batteries type Excide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Figure 109 Connection of backup batteries type Excide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Figure 110 Contents of the air vent kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Figure 111 Connection of backup batteries (Co. Oerlikon) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Figure 112 Setup of the batteries, fixing of the tray bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Figure 113 Connection between the batteries, battery cable connection . . . . . . . . 117
Figure 114 Routing of the air vent tubes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Figure 115 Switch OFF the battery breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Figure 116 Removal of the MK:BATTERY, battery numbering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Figure 117 Parts for battery fixing of MK:BATTFIXCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Figure 118 Position of the spacer strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Figure 119 Example of battery cabling in a Service2 shelter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Figure 120 Connection between batteries and AD-panel in Service1A . . . . . . . . . 122
Figure 121 Connection of the battery cables at the AD-Panel ADP-2Vx . . . . . . . . 122
Figure 122 Cable connections MK:BATTERY with Enersys batteries . . . . . . . . . . 123
Figure 123 Cable connections MK:BATTERY with Oerlikon batteries . . . . . . . . . . 124
Figure 124 Alarm cable connection at the battery breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Figure 125 Battery breaker alarm cabling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Figure 126 Disconnection of the battery system BS-241 IIB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Figure 127 Mounting of the rear support rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Figure 128 Mounted support rails with spacers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Figure 129 Fitting of the batteries (type: Hoppecke) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Figure 130 Mounted angle plates at front support rail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Figure 131 Mounting position of the fitting elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Figure 132 Battery set, completed with inter-connections and venting system . . . 131
Figure 133 Mounting of support rails in earthquake zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Figure 134 Support rails with downholding spacers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Figure 135 Parts of the battery bus bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Figure 136 Mounted bus bars with connected -48 V DC cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Figure 137 Overview of battery cabling inside the Service1B shelter . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Figure 138 Battery breaker connections of the Service1B shelter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Figure 139 Mounting position of the temperature sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

9
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d8058071bc04
Figure 140 Mounting kit for link equipment MK:LE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Figure 141 Routing of microwave antenna cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Figure 142 Alarm- and power supply connection for link equipment (BS-241) . . . 140
Figure 143 Connection of the DC supply cables (cable no. 401). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Figure 144 DC distribution block with microwave units in Service1A (BS-241 II) . 141
Figure 145 DC distribution block with microwave units in Service2 (BS-241 II). . . 142
Figure 146 Overview of microwave cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Figure 147 Overview of NTPM cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Figure 148 Interfaces of the frame F:NT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Figure 149 Location of the CAN-Bus interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Figure 150 Example of CAN-Bus connections between the shelters. . . . . . . . . . . 149
Figure 151 Interfaces for SELIC-cables inside the Base shelter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Figure 152 SELIC-Cabling between the shelters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Figure 153 Location of the DC terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Figure 154 -48 V DC distribution (example). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Figure 155 Terminals for -48 V DC wires (AD-Panel ADPA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Figure 156 -48V DC cable routing between Service1A and Base / Extension shelters
154
Figure 157 -48V DC cable routing between Service1A and Service2 shelters . . . 155
Figure 158 16-carrier site with BS-241 II Shelters (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Figure 159 DC cable routing Service1A with ADP-2V1 to Service 2/1 - 2/3 . . . . . 158
Figure 160 AC cabling between the BS-241 shelters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Figure 161 Location of the AC terminal block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Figure 162 Location of the heater (example: Service1A). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Figure 163 Heater AC cabling between the shelters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Figure 164 Survey of battery cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Figure 165 Example of battery cabling with batteries in the Service1A shelter . . . 166
Figure 166 Circuit diagram with batteries in the Service1A shelter . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Figure 167 Example of battery cabling without batteries in the Service1A shelter 167
Figure 168 Circuit diagram without batteries in the Service1A shelter. . . . . . . . . . 168
Figure 169 Overview of battery breakers for battery sets in the Service1A / Service2
shelter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Figure 170 Example of battery cabling with batteries in the Service1A shelter . . . 170
Figure 171 Circuit diagram with batteries in the Service1A shelter . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Figure 172 Circuit diagram without batteries in the Service1A shelter. . . . . . . . . . 171
Figure 173 Overview of battery breakers for battery sets in the Service1A / Service2
shelter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Figure 174 -48 V DC connections between BS-241 / BS-241 II shelters (example)173
Figure 175 Heater AC cabling between BS-241 and BS-241 II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Figure 176 Example of battery cabling with BS-241 and BS-241 II Service shelters. .
176
Figure 177 Battery cable 110/*/M and 111/*/M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Figure 178 Terminal for battery cabling at F:AC/DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Figure 179 Alarm cabling between BS-241 IIB shelters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Figure 180 DC cabling between BS-241 IIB shelters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Figure 181 CAN-BUS and CC-link cabling between BS-241 IIB shelters . . . . . . . 181
Figure 182 Cabling between BS-241 II and BS-241 IIB Extension shelter . . . . . . 182
Figure 183 Cabling between BS-241 II and BS-241 IIB Base shelter . . . . . . . . . . 182
10 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d8058071bc04
Figure 184 Cabling between BS-241II S1B shelters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Figure 185 Fixing of the modules (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Figure 186 Fixing of the modules (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Figure 187 Location of the code key no. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Figure 188 Components of the AC/DC frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Figure 189 Fitting of the air flaps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Figure 190 Setup of the rubber sealing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Figure 191 Plug-in of the fan cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Figure 192 Air duct mounting, disconnection CAN-BUS cable no. 91 . . . . . . . . . . 193
Figure 193 Connection CAN-BUS and interconnection cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Figure 194 Cable connections at AC/DC frame 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Figure 195 Connection of DC and battery cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Figure 196 Routing of the Battery Breaker Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Figure 197 Fitting the fans, closing the AC/DC frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Figure 198 Example of system cabling with semi-rigid cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Figure 199 Example of system cabling with flexible cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

11
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d8058071bc04
List of Tables
Table 1 Site aquisition guide regarding acoustic noise emission . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Table 2 Recommended fixing material for BS-241 / 241 II on foundation . . . . . 35
Table 3 Wiring of Abis interface PCM0, 75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Table 4 Wiring of Abis interface PCM1, 75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Table 5 Wiring of the monitoring interfaces PCM0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Table 6 Wiring of the monitoring interfaces PCM1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Table 7 Terminal arrangement for external clock connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Table 8 ETHCON trace adapter ports, pin arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Table 9 Wiring of the PCM0 interface without OVPT (SubD 25 connector) . . . . 74
Table 10 Wiring of the PCM1 interface without OVPT (SubD 25 connector) . . . . 75
Table 11 Wiring ACTM connectors X1 - X4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Table 12 Wiring ACTM connectors X5 - X8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Table 13 Wiring ACTM connector X9, X10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Table 14 Pin assignments ACTM24 connectors X1...X4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Table 15 OPEXAL10V1 module 0 connection at ACTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Table 16 OPEXAL10V1 module 1 connection at ACTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Table 17 ACTC alarms for BS-241 shelter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Table 18 Contact data of the smoke sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Table 19 ACTC alarms for BS-241 II shelters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Table 20 Contact data of the smoke sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Table 21 ACTC-4 alarms for BS-241 II shelters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Table 22 Contact data of the smoke sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Table 23 ACTCS alarms for BS-241 II Service1B shelter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Table 24 DC supply and fuses for link equipment of ACTCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Table 25 Wiring of the LMT interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Table 26 Wiring of the LMT RJ45 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Table 27 Types of the MHA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Table 28 Types of the MHA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Table 29 Overview of backup batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Table 30 Selection of Slot ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Table 31 Battery charging modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Table 32 Battery sets and mounting kits for Service1B shelter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Table 33 List of cables for battery cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Table 34 Pre-fabricated cables between OVPT/ABISCON and the microwave units
142
Table 35 Wiring of -48 V interface of frame F:NT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Table 36 Wiring of PCM-Input connector of frame F:NT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Table 37 Wiring of PCM-Output connector of frame F:NT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Table 38 List of cables for CAN-Bus cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Table 39 List of SELIC-cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Table 40 List of DC cable connections between the shelters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Table 41 Cable sets for Service1A to Base, Extension1 and Extension2 . . . . . 155
Table 42 LE- DC supply: cable routing between Service1A and Service2/1...2/3 .
155
Table 43 LE: DC cable routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Table 44 F:NT: DC cable routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
12 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d8058071bc04
Table 45 DC cable routing Service1A to Base and Extension 1/2 with ADP-2V1 . .
157
Table 46 DC cable routing Service1A to Base and Extension 1/2 with ADP-2V1 . .
158
Table 47 List of heater-cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Table 48 List of AC cables between the BS-241 shelters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Table 49 List of tempresistor cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Table 50 List of battery cables between the shelters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Table 51 List of battery cables between the shelters (BS-241 II) . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Table 52 List of battery cables (BS-241 II with ADP-2V1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Table 53 DC-cables for BS-241 / BS-241 II shelter extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Table 54 Battery cable kits for connections between BS-241 and BS-241 II Service
shelters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Table 55 List of the tempresistor cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Table 56 Alarm cabling between BS-241 IIB shelters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Table 57 DC cabling between BS-241 IIB shelters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Table 58 CAN-BUS and CC-link cabling between BS-241 IIB shelters . . . . . . . 180
Table 59 CC-link cabling between BS-241 / BS-241 II and BS-241 IIB Extension
shelter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Table 60 CC-link cabling between BS-24 1IIB Base and BS-241/ BS-241 II Exten-
sion shelters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Table 61 Relations between cover parts and modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Table 62 Module HW Code Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Table 63 Functionality of semi-rigid system cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Table 64 BS-241 II, flexible system cables ACOM - FCU, ECU, GCU . . . . . . . . 199
Table 65 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Table 66 Checklist for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

13
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Reason for Update
Id:0900d8058071e1ab
Reason for Update
Issue History
Issue Date Summary
Issue history for this document with order number A30808-X3247-K390-*-7631
1 07/2002 First issue for external use
2 11/2002 Second issue for external use
3 12/2003 Third issue for external use
4 02/2004 Fourth issue for external use
5 03/2004 Fifth issue for external use
6 04/2004 Sixth issue for external use
7 05/2004 Seventh issue for external use
8 08/2004 Eighth issue for external use
9 11/2004 Ninth issue for external use
10 01/2005 Tenth issue for external use
11 04/2005 Eleventh issue for external use
12 07/2005 Twelfth issue for external use
13 09/2005 Thirteenth issue for external use
14 10/2005 Fourteenth issue for external use
15 11/2005 Fifteenth issue for external use
16 03/2006 Sixteenth issue for external use
17 04/2006 Seventeenth issue for external use
Issue history for this document with order number A50016-G5100-A390-*-7631
01 11/2006 New order number
02 04/2007 Battery charging modes dependend on the battery type added
03 07/2007 Installation of shelter type S30861-C4058 included
Disconnection of the internal battery system in case of a longer
non operational state added
04 12/2007 Modified describtion of system cabling BS-241 II with flexible
cables
05 07/2008 New document structure
Updated list of Installation tools in section 8.1
New section 6.2 Battery-Upgrade of BS-241
14 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d8058071e1ab
Reason for Update
Issue 13, release-independent, valid with starting Release BR 6.0
06 11/2008 Updated list of Installation Tools in section 7.1
Section 3.5: New module ETHCON and connections with optical
cables added
Section 3.6: New module ACTM24 added
Section 4.1: Installation of batteries in Service1B shelter added
Section 4.1: New battery types added
07 12/2008 Section 2.5: Service1B shelter added
Section 2.7.2: Service1B shelter added
Section 3.12: New section with description and connection of
ACTCS added
all sections: editorial changes
08 03/2009 Section 3.17.3: Installation of MHA added
Section 4.1.5: Battery breaker alarmconnection of the Service1B
shelter added
Section 4.1.6: Placement of the temperature sensor of the
Service1B shelter added
09 04/2009 Section 2: Editorial changes
Section 4.5: Cabling between BS-241 IIB shelters added
10 07/2009 all sections: modified graphics
new section 4.5.3 CAN-bus / CC-link cabling BS-241 IIB added
new section 4.6 Cabling between BS-241/241 II and BS-241 IIB
added
11 11/2009 section 4.1 Backup batteries updated, new battery type
Enersys SBS 190F added
new section 4.7 Cabling between BS-241IIB S1B shelters
added
section 4.8: overview of cover parts added
12 02/2010 section 4.1 Backup batteries updated
13 03/2010 section 2.7 Fixing of the shelters modified
Issue Date Summary
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

15
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Introduction
Id:0900d805805c357a
1 Introduction
1.1 Purpose of the manual
This document is intended to give the information necessary for the installation of the
BS-241 / 241 II in the Base Station System (BSS).
It contains a description of all the necessary steps to install the BTS on site and integrate
it into the required infrastructure.
The document includes the following informations:
Equipment delivery and transportation
Equipment unpacking
Preliminary checks of equipment
Fixing of the shelters to foundation or base construction
in addition the connection of the base station to:
Power supply
PCM - network
Grounding system
Receive / transmit antenna system
External alarm sensors
For installation of equipment not supplied by Siemens (e.g. antennas, transmission
equipment etc.) refer to site specific documentation or vendor instructions provided with
the equipment.
1.2 Installation prerequisites
It is required that the installer pay attention to all valid installation standards as well as
EMC and EMF standards as they are listed in Guide to Documentation
(Siemens document number X3247-K52-*-6735). The installation staff should have a
basic knowledge of these standards.
The equipment on site has to provide interfaces for the connection of external cables
according to EMC requirements and instructions in this manual.
The installation manual must be available for the installer on site.
!
CAUTION
The CE declaration of conformity for the product will be fulfilled if the setup and cabling
is undertaken in accordance with the specification in the manual and the documentation
listed there, such as mounting instructions, cable lists etc. Where necessary, project-
specific documentation should be taken into account.
Deviations from the specifications or independent changes during setup, such as use of
cable types with lower screening values, for example, can lead to the CE requirements
being violated. In such cases the CE declaration of conformity is invalidated and the
responsibility passes to the person who has caused the deviations.
The applying technical standards are listed in Guide to Documentation
(Siemens document number A30808-X3247-K52-*-7635)
16 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805805c357a
Introduction
1.3 Handling of the modules
All boards and modules must be handled with extreme care as each one may contains
electrostatically sensitive devices (ESD).
The modules marked with the ESD-label are sensitive to static discharge.
Figure 1 ESD Symbol
Pay attention to the following rules:
Avoid handling the modules in a high-static environment.
Do not touch connector contacts.
An earthed high-impedance wrist strap must be worn when handling modules.
Use the socket or the press stud at the shelters for wrist strap connection (see
figures below).
The modules must be transported their original package.
Figure 2 Socket for wrist strap connection (BS-241)
Figure 3 Press-stud for ESD wrist strap connection (BS-241 II)
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

17
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter installation
Id:0900d8058071e1ae
2 Shelter installation
2.1 Position in the system
The BS241 241II interconnects the MS via the Um interface with the trunk network via
the Abis interface.
Figure 4 Position of the base station within the SBS
2.2 Site requirements
The site must fulfill installation rules according to ETS 300253 or EN 503010 and
EN 50174. The lightning protection measures shall be in accordance with IEC62305-1
to IEC62305-5 to achieve a lightning protection zone 1 (LPZ1).
With regard to explosion hazards, rooms for base stations with integral battery back-up
system must allow sufficient ventilation to maintain a hydrogen concentration below
critical threshold (4%vol.). This value is calculated according to IEC/EN50272-2 (float
charge mode).
It is important, that the installation site and the transportation route meets the valid floor
load requirements. If the floor load rating is unknown, be sure to find out with a building
engineer or another appropriate professional during the site acquisition.
Prior to the commencement of installation, the site have to be prepared as follows:
A concrete foundation is needed for rural sites.
A site-specific base construction has to be mounted (if no foundation is provided).
The installation area should be clear of standing water, fallen leaves, mud and
building debris.
Measures should be taken to avoid unauthorized access.
The lightning protection system must be complete.
All installation works of 3 phase 230 V AC or -48 V DC power supply, including a
circuit breaker in each phase or the -48 V DC line have to be finished.
A ground bar has to be installed with proper connection to the site grounding system.
The shelters should be installed after all required infrastructure (antennas/antenna
cabling, PCM lines...) has been completely prepared.
For the aquisition of BS-241 / 241 II sites pay attention to the following minimum
distance values to avoid exceeding the Acoustic Noise.
Um
Abis
interface
Asub
interface
A
interface
SB S
BT S
BS C T RA U MS C
interface
Mobile
Statio n
18 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d8058071e1ae
Shelter installation
g NOTE
The table is based on the document Bericht Nr.58731/1, 27. Febr. 2004. The
values extracted from the document referenced above show always the worst case
of each area classification / IRW.
The area classes Allgemeine Wohngebiete und Kleinsiedlungsgebiete and Reine
Wohngebiete have been joined to Wohngebiete, whereby the values of the area
class Reine Wohngebiete were taken.
The guidelines are valid only in the range of application of the TA-Lrm, hence in
Germany only.
Area Classifications Required minimum distance to point of interest (m)
Shelter is placed
without any reflect-
ing obstacle
Shelter is placed
before a reflecting
obstacle (e.g. wall)
Shelter is placed
in a corner of 2
reflecting obsta-
cles (e.g. walls)
Industrial Areas
IRW = 100 % 1 1 1
IRW - 12 dB 1 1 1
IRW - 20 dB 1 6 9
Business Areas
IRW = 100 % 1 1 1
IRW - 12 dB 1 6 8
IRW - 20 dB 10 13 17
Rural Areas
IRW = 100 % 1 1 1
IRW - 12 dB 7 10 13
IRW - 20 dB 16 21 28
Residential Areas
IRW = 100 % 7 10 13
IRW - 12 dB 23 31 42
IRW - 20 dB 51 63 93
Hospital Areas
IRW = 100 % 12 16 21
IRW - 12 dB 38 51 69
IRW - 20 dB 84 113 151
Facing the side panels of the BTS to the direction of the emission place, a noise reduc-
tion up to 4 dB can be achieved.
Table 1 Site aquisition guide regarding acoustic noise emission
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

19
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter installation
Id:0900d8058071e1ae
2.3 Environmental conditions
The location of a site may directly effect the correct operation and the useful life period
of the base station. The following recommendations should be considered:
Sites located on tall buildings provide cleaner environments for the equipment inside
the shelters.
The installation under trees is not recommended due to the increased levels of
insects and leaves, which may be drawn into the cooling system by the fans and
could block the air-stream.
In terms of excessive salt contamination situations it is recommended not to place
the shelters close to coastal areas in order to avoid shorter maintenance intervals.
It is recommended to keep a distance of about > 1500 m from the coast. Shelters on
coastal sites should not be installed with the air intakes facing into sea water spray.
The installation nearby sources of hydro carbon gas emissions (e.g. chimney,
exhaust air outlets) is not recommended in order to avoid shorter service intervals
of the membrane filters.
In areas of heavy snow fall the base station should be placed on a socket with an
appropriate height, so that the air intakes will not be blocked by snow.
In areas prone to flooding the base station should not be placed on the ground,
because its bottom section is not waterproof.
Sites located close to excessive airborne dust clouds i.e. cement, coal deposits etc.
are also not recommended in order to avoid contamination of the cooling system and
increased maintenance.
g NOTE
Caution for non-intended operation interrupt: Keep doors of BS-241 IIB-Base &
Extension Shelters closed at ambient temperatures equal to/below -14C. Opening
of shelter doors provokes falling of monitored, shelter-internal temperature below
lowest allowed level. This effects the Shelter's system modules being disconnected
from DC for protection purposes.
20 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d8058071e1ae
Shelter installation
2.4 Site configuration
Operation of the base station requires additional equipment on site.
Figure 5 Typical BS-241 site (example with BS-241 II shelters)
2.5 Construction view
The BTSE is housed in shelters with the following dimensions (H x W x D):
BS-241 (all shelters) 1750 mm x 700mm x 650 mm
BS-241 II (all shelters) 1750 mm x 700mm x 658 mm
BS-241 II (shelters with double subracks) 1650 mm x 700mm x 658 mm
BS-241 II (Service1B shelter) 1750 mm x 700mm x 757 mm
Because of the flexible configuration, several cable kits will be used for connections
between the shelters. The following shelter types are available:
mandatory:
Base Shelter; contains core modules, up to 8 carrier units and antenna combiners.
Service1 Shelter for BS-241; contains AC/DC converters, supervised by the AC/DC
controller, backup batteries and link equipment in flexible configuration.
Service1A Shelter for BS-241 II; contains AC/DC converters, supervised by the
AC/DC controller, backup batteries and link equipment in flexible configuration.
Service1B Shelter for BS-241 II; contains AC/DC converters, supervised by the
AC/DC controller, backup batteries and link equipment in flexible configuration.
base construction
antenna cables
microwave cables
power distribution
ground bar
cable runway
Service1 Shelter Base Shelter
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

21
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter installation
Id:0900d8058071e1ae
optional:
Extension Shelter; contains up to 8 carrier units and antenna combiners.
Service2 Shelter; contains additional backup batteries and link equipment in flexible
configuration.
The minimal configuration with max. 8 carrier units requires a Base Shelter and a
Service1 / Service1A Shelter. A site with the max. number of 24 carrier units requires a
Base Shelter, 2 Extension Shelters and a Service1 / Service1A Shelter.
If more than 8 Carrier Units should be installed on site or in case of later extension, one
or two Extension Shelters have to be added.
The equipment in an Extension Shelter is equal to those of the Base Shelter (exepted
core modules).
For additional of link equipment or battery sets, up to three Service2 Shelters can be
added.
The integrated climate control system of the shelters guarantees the proper outdoor
operation.The shelters are protected against water splashing from any direction accord-
ing to IP 55 (EN60529).
2.5.1 Functional units and modules
The first shelter is called Base Shelter and contains the following modules:
Generic Modules:
Core Basis (COBA); Essential components are the base core controller (BCC), the
advanced clock generation (ACLK), the carrier unit interfaces (CC-Link), the PCM30/24
Abis interfaces, the internal system alarm interface, the LMT interface and an interface
to a core satellite (COSA) to expand the COBA.
The priority tasks of the module are local control of the BTSE, generat of system clocks,
routing data to the CU and handling of O&M messages.
Core Satellite (COSA); The task of the COSA is to expand the number of Abis inter-
faces and CC-links of the COBA. The essential components are the PCM30/24 Abis
interfaces and the BUS-interface to the COBA. The COSA will be controlled by the
COBA.
Alarm Collection Terminal (ACT); collects all alarms for those units having no direct
access to the CAN-Bus and forwards them via CAN-Bus interface to COBA.
Overvoltage Protection and Tracer (OVPT); protect the PMC24/30 ports of core
boards against overvoltage and provides monitoring interfaces for connected Abis
lines).
Abis Connection Module (ABISCON): Provides the connection terminal for the periph-
eral Abis cables. The ABISCON provides monitoring interfaces for connected Abis lines
and serves as interface for external synchronization clock.
Carrier related Modules:
Carrier Unit (CU); consists of a receiving and transmitting part with synthesizer and
power amplifier, a signal processing unit as well as a power supply unit.
EDGE Carrier Unit (ECU); using the same interfaces as CU, but it supports EDGE func-
tionality in up- and downlink direction.
Flex Carrier Unit (FCU): The FlexCU is a two-carrier unit and similar to the ECU. The
FCU allows the expansion of the number of TRX per BTSE up to max. 48.
22 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d8058071e1ae
Shelter installation
Antenna related Modules:
Duplexer Amplifier Multicoupler (DUAMCO): The DUAMCO consists of two identical
modules. Each module contains a duplex filter, that combines the TX and RX path to a
common antenna. The DUAMCO2:2 is used for only one carrier per antenna, the
DUAMCO4:2 is used to combine two carrier per antenna and the DUAMCO8:2 is used
to combine up to four carrier per antenna.
Flexible Duplexer and Multicoupler (FDUAMCO): Same functionality as the
DUAMCO2:2 and DUAMCO4:2. The 2:2 or 4:2 configuration can be selected by
applying jumper cables.
To provide a DUAMCO 8:2 functionality, a COAMCO8 is required in addition to the
FDUAMCO.
Combiner and Multicoupler Extension (COAMCO8): The COAMCO8 is used with a
FDUAMCO together to provide a 8:2 configuration.
Filter Combiner (FICOM): One base module of the FICOM is needed per cell and is
able to combine the TX path of two carriers to one antenna. The base module can be
expanded with up to 3 expansion modules if more than 2 carriers should be combined
to one antenna. The expansion modules is able to combine 2 carriers in addition. In
maximum 8 carrier, that belongs to the same cell can be combined to one antenna.
DI-Amplifier Multicoupler (DIAMCO): The DIAMCO consists of two independent
modules. Each module contains an RX-filter, a two-stage low noise amplifier (LNA), an
attenuator and a power splitter. The DIAMCO splits the RX antenna signal and can drive
up to 8 receiver inputs.
Via the antenna feeder cable the DC power for the tower mounted amplifier will be deliv-
ered by the DIAMCO.
High Power Duplexer (HPDU): The main task of the HPDU is to combine the TX- and
the RX-path to one antenna, in order to minimize the number of antennas if the FICOM
module is used.
Multiple Duplexer (MDUX / HYBRID6): The MDUX unit consists of six identical
Modules (05), each having transmit and receive path with one antenna port. Each
module has one TX input, four RX outputs and one RX cascading output. For each
MDUX two HYBRID6 are available to change the standard 6:6 configuration to 12:6.
The Base shelter (and the optional Extension shelters) needs a Service1 (BS-241) or a
Service1A shelter (BS-241 II), that has to be installed close to the Base Shelter.
AC/DC Converters (ACDC); converts the mains voltage into the -48 V DC supply
voltage.
Link equipment (LE); can be NTPM if terrestrial lines are used for connections to the
BSC or microwave indoor units.
Backup battery system; guarantees continuous operation for a certain time in case of
mains breakdown or AC/DC failure.
Additional Service2 Shelters are used, to extend the number of link equipment and the
expected battery backup time.
A selection of configuration variants of the shelters is provided in the following sections.
g NOTE
All empty slots in a partially equipped subrack must be closed with cover plates, so
that the air flow inside the shelter will not be affected.
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

23
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter installation
Id:0900d8058071e1ae
Cover plates are not necessary for link equipment and empty battery trays.
24 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d8058071e1ae
Shelter installation
2.5.2 Site with BS-241 shelters (example)
Figure 6 16-carrier site with BS-241 shelters (example)
LMT
ETHERNET
SIEMENS
ACOM
#0
ACOM
#1
ACOM
#2
ACOM
#3
CU
#0
CU
#1
CU
#2
CU
#3
CU
#4
CU
#5
CU
#6
CU
#7 D
I
A
M
C
O

#
0
D
I
A
M
C
O

#
1
C
O
B
A

0
C
O
S
A

0
C
O
B
A

1
C
O
S
A

1
SIEMENS
ACOM
#0
ACOM
#1
ACOM
#2
ACOM
#3
CU
#0
CU
#1
CU
#2
CU
#3
CU
#4
CU
#5
CU
#6
CU
#7 D
I
A
M
C
O

#
0
D
I
A
M
C
O

#
1
SIEMENS
AC/
DC
CTRL
AC/
DC
AC/
DC
AC/
DC
AC/
DC
AC/
DC
AC/
DC
00 01 02 03 04 05
Base Shelter Extension Shelter Service1 Shelter
SIEMENS
Service2 Shelter
FAN#0 FAN#1 FAN#0 FAN#1 FAN#0 FAN#1 FAN#0 FAN#1
FAN#2 FAN#3 FAN#2 FAN#3 FAN#2 FAN#3
FAN#4 FAN#5 FAN#4 FAN#5
LE #0
LE #4
LE #1
LE #2
LE #3
LE #5
LE #0
LE #4
LE #1
LE #2
LE #3
LE #5
LE #6
LE #10
LE #7
LE #8
LE #9
LE #11
ACTP ACTP ACTP ACTM
MSU:AC
DC-Panel DC-Panel DC-Panel DC-Panel AC-Panel
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

25
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter installation
Id:0900d8058071e1ae
2.5.3 Site with BS-241 II shelters (example)
Figure 7 16-carrier site with BS-241 II shelters (example)
g NOTE
If the antenna combining will be done by Multiple Duplexer Units MDUX in conjunc-
tion with the extension modules HYBRID6, one MDUX unit is placed into a double
ACOM slot: MDUX#0 is allocated to the ACOM slots #0 and #1, MDUX#1 is allo-
cated to the ACOM slots #2 and #3 (see figure above).
Unequipped slots have to be closed by cover plates, excepted slots for link equip-
ment and empty battery trays.
2.5.4 Site with BS-241 IIB shelters
The site with BS-241 IIB shelter can consist of a Service1B and a Base shelter with up
to 8 carriers. An Extension 1 and a Extension 2 shelter can be added to expand the
capacity up to 24 carrier. The backup battery capacity can expanded by 2 additional
Service shelters with up to 3 battery sets.
The shelters can be installed in a row close together, a gap between the shelters is
possible (see following figure).
All cables between the shelters will be routed via the cable feeding module in the shel-
ters bottom. The cables must be shielded with braided cable screen.
ACOM
#0
ACOM
#1
ACOM
#2
ACOM
#3
CU
#0
CU
#1
CU
#2
CU
#3
CU
#4
CU
#5
CU
#6
CU
#7 D
I
A
M
C
O

#
0
D
I
A
M
C
O

#
1
C
O
B
A

0
C
O
S
A

0
C
O
B
A

1
C
O
S
A

1
ACOM
#0
ACOM
#1
ACOM
#2
ACOM
#3
CU
#0
CU
#1
CU
#2
CU
#3
CU
#4
CU
#5
CU
#6
CU
#7 D
I
A
M
C
O

#
0
D
I
A
M
C
O

#
1
FAN#4 FAN#5
FAN#0 FAN#1
FAN#2 FAN#3
FAN#0 FAN#1
FAN#2 FAN#3
FAN#4 FAN#5
FAN#0 FAN#1
FAN#0 FAN#1
MK: Batt ery
MK: Batt ery
ACTP
Service2 Shelte r Service1A Shelte r Base Shelte r
Extension Shelte r
H
P
D
U
1
H
P
D
U
1
H
P
D
U
0
H
P
D
U
0
MK: Batt ery
HU # 1 for LE
HU # 2 for LE
HU # 3 for LE
HU # 0 for LE
HU # 4 for LE
HU # 5 for LE
HU # 1 for LE
HU # 2 for LE
HU # 3 for LE
HU # 0 for LE
HU # 4 for LE
HU # 5 for LE
DC-Panel DC-Panel DC-Panel AD-Panel DC-Panel
ACTP ACTP ACTM MSU:AC
26 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d8058071e1ae
Shelter installation
Figure 8 16-carrier site with BS-241 IIB shelters (example)
battery battery battery battery
battery battery battery battery
battery battery battery battery
ADPA
LE #0
LE #1
LE #2
LE #3
LE #4
DCP
FAN 0 FAN 1
FAN 2 FAN 3
HEATER
HEATER
CU
#4
CU
#5
CU
#6
CU
#7
ACOM
#4
CU
#0
CU
#1
CU
#2
CU
#3
ACOM
#0
ACOM
#1
ACOM
#2
ACOM
#3
CORE
DCP
FAN 0 FAN 1
FAN 2 FAN 3
HEATER
HEATER
CU
#4
CU
#5
CU
#6
CU
#7
ACOM
#4
CU
#0
CU
#1
CU
#2
CU
#3
ACOM
#0
ACOM
#1
ACOM
#2
ACOM
#3
CORE
Service 1B shelter Base shelter Extension 1 shelter
mounted in a row distance stand alone position
Note: Installation of the shelters without gap is recommended, but not required. Extension 2 shelter not shown.
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

27
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter installation
Id:0900d8058071e1ae
2.6 Equipment delivery
The shelters are mounted on a wooden pallet. To avoid the damage of the paint coat,
the shelter edges are protected with carton profiles and the shelters are wrapped with
PE-foil.
The Service shelters will be delivered without backup batteries.
Additional crates are used for transportation of the battery sets.
A label with the following information for delivery identification is fixed at the shelter:
Customer order number
Serial numbers of the shelter or other supplied equipment
Destination
Gross and net weight
Overall dimensions (cm)
A plastic bag contains all delivery papers.
The shelter should be transported to the site on an air-suspensioned truck, recom-
mended with 4WD, minimum 2.000 kg payload and lifting stage.
To load the shelter onto the transporting vehicle, proceed as follows:
1. Maneuver the forklift truck, with its forks lowered, to the center of the base of the
shipping pallet.
2. When the forklift is in position, a suitable tension belt has to be positioned around
the shelter and the forklift mast . Tighten the belt.
3. Raise the shelter until it is at a suitable height to load onto the transporting vehicle.
4. Lower the shelter onto the transporting vehicle.
5. Remove the straps and the packing.
6. Secure the shelter to the transporting vehicle. (this operation is the responsibility of
the company transporting the shelter).
Prior to the arrival of the shelters, the installation personnel should designate an area at
the site, where the equipment can be unloaded and unpacked.
The shelters should be delivered to the site with the necessary equipment dollies and
padding for movement from the unloading area to the installation point.
To unload the shelter from the vehicle, perform the following steps:
1. Release the straps etc. securing the pallet to the transporting vehicle.
2. Maneuver the forklift into position so that the forks are aligned under the center of
the pallet.
3. Raise the pallet to clear the transporting vehicle and lower it to the ground in the
vicinity of the base construction or foundation onto which it is to be located.
!
WARNING
The movement of the shelter should be supervised by personnel qualified in heavy lifting
and safety. All personnel must be properly attired, wearing a safety helmet, safety boots
and protective glooves.
28 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d8058071e1ae
Shelter installation
2.6.1 Preliminary checks
Each shelter is equipped with a Shockwatch
TM
-label and a TIP (N) TELL
TM
-label. The
labels are fixed at the shelters front panel, to indicate fallover or strong shocks during
the transport from the factory to the site.
If the TIP (N) TELL
TM
arrow is blue, the package has been on the side or tipped over in
transit. The Shockwatch
TM
-label red color indicates that the package has been shocked
during the transport.
Check that the shelter and labels are in proper condition. If there is obvious damage due
to transportation, unpack the equipment in the presence of an insurance company rep-
resentative and promptly claim any damage. Inform the shipper of the specific damage.
Check that the package is actually addressed to the site and complete.
Figure 9 Shockwatch
TM
-label and TIP (N) TELL
TM
-label
2.6.2 Unpacking the shelter
During the unpacking steps, great care must be taken to ensure that the shelter will be
not scratched or damaged in any way. Unpack the shelter in steps as follows:
1. Cut the straps that wrapped around shelter and pallet.
2. Cut the protection foil at the shelter edges from the top to the bottom.
3. Remove the protection foil and the carton profiles.
4. Release the bolts securing the shelter to the pallet (The 4 bolts are accessible after
removal of the plinths front cover).
5. Move the shelter from the transportation pallet.
Shockwatch
TM
-label
TIP (N) TELL
TM
-label
!
WARNING
Safety gloves and goggles must be worn when cutting the straps.
Pay attention to the tension of the straps. Use only plate shears.
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

29
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter installation
Id:0900d8058071e1ae
Immediately after unpacking the shelter, inspect it for damage and report any damage
to the transportation company.
2.6.3 Transport with crane or helicopter
If the shelter should be lifted by crane or helicopter, 4 M12 crane eye bolts have to be
screwed into threaded holes on the top of the shelter.
2.6.3.1 Transport of BS-241 shelters
Proceed in accordance with Figure 10 - Figure 12 in the following steps:
1. Open the shelters door first. Therefore turn the lid of the lock mechanism to the side
for key hole access. Insert the key in the lock and turn it clockwise. After unlocking,
the handle can be moved out. To open the door, turn the handle counter-clockwise
for 60.
2. For removal of the roof, loosen both screws in the top profile of the shelter.
3. Lift up the roof backwards to an angle of 60.
4. Remove the roof from the hinges.
5. Place the roof on the floor, avoid any damages of the paint coat.
6. Screw the 4 plastic caps out of the threaded holes on the top of the shelter.
7. Screw the crane eye bolts into the M12 threads.
8. After the lifting works are finished and the shelter is in its final position, unscrew the
crane eye bolts and retain them for future use.
9. Screw the plastic caps into the threads.
10. Setup the roof onto the shelters top rear first, so that both hinges are fitted into the
cut outs.
11. Flap down the roof.
12. Press down the roof onto the shelter, so that it can be fixed without gap.
13. Fix the roof with both screws at the top profile of the shelter.
!
WARNING
The burning of packing material should be avoided, as packaging may give off toxic
gases.
!
WARNING
The total weight of the shelter must not exceed 450 kg when being lifted.
!
WARNING
The battery sets must not be placed inside the shelter during transportation. The door
must be kept closed.
30 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d8058071e1ae
Shelter installation
Figure 10 Opening of the shelter door
Figure 11 Removal of the roof
Figure 12 Mounting of the crane eye bolts
loosen
lift up and
slide back
srew down
eye bolts
remove
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

31
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter installation
Id:0900d8058071e1ae
Figure 13 Guideline for crane transport
60
top
32 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d8058071e1ae
Shelter installation
2.6.3.2 Transport of BS-241 II shelters
Prepare the shelter for lifting with crane or helicopter as follows:
1. Screw out the 4 security screws (HEX 8 with 3 mm pin) on the top of the shelter.
2. Retain the screws and sealing washers reliably.
3. Screw the M12 crane eye bolts into the threaded holes.
After the lifting works are finished and the shelter is in its final mounting position:
1. Screw out the crane eye bolts.
2. Attach the sealing washer to each security screw.
3. Screw the security screws into the threads.
4. Tighten the screw connection to a torque of 35...40 Nm (shelter type S30861-
C2028-X-9) or with a torque of 22 Nm (shelter type S30861-C2038-X-6).
Figure 14 Mounting of crane eye bolts
Figure 15 Guideline for crane transport
60
top
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

33
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter installation
Id:0900d8058071e1ae
2.6.4 Unpacking of modules and batteries
Unpack the modules as follows:
1. Open the carton with a suitable knife along the adhesive tape on the top.
2. Take the PVC foil bag that contain the module out of the carton.
3. Open the PVC protection bag carefully with the knife and take out the module.
Avoid the handling of the modules in high-static environmental. The packing material
should be preserved for possible re-packing.
The battery sets will be shipped in wooden crates, including a plastic bag that contains
cable sets, screws,washers and the connection plates. In addition the parts of the air
vent system with installation instruction.
Figure 16 Unpacking of the battery sets
1. Cut the tension belts with a plate shear.
2. Remove the top cover of the wooden crate.
3. Take the batteries out of the crate using the battery handles.
cut
!
WARNING
The burning of packing material should be avoided, as packaging may give off toxic
gases.
34 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d8058071e1ae
Shelter installation
2.7 Fixing of the shelters
2.7.1 Mounting on concrete foundation
The shelters can be mounted directly on a concrete foundation with dimensions as
shown in Figure 17 (example for 3-shelter configuration).
Figure 17 Foundation design for BS-241 / 241 II shelter (proposal)
It is necessary to mark the drilling holes in accordance with Figure 17 and Figure 18.
Each shelter must be fixed to the foundation with 4 bolts M12.
!
WARNING
It is strikly not allowed to install the shelter without fixing to a concrete foundation or base
construction.
2600
2100
top view
cable channel 250 x 100
sketch without scale
all measures in mm
200 300
A
B
B
sect ion A - A
3
5
0
6
0
0
253
848
106
154 9
225 0
- 150
cable chann el
2
5
3
2
7
3
1
9
5
0
2
0
0
6
5
0
1
1
0
0
frost protection gravel
until min. -800 mm
-800
+100
+/-0
reinforced concrete
type 25
gradient appox. 2%
sect ion B - B
A
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

35
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter installation
Id:0900d8058071e1ae
g NOTE
The material can be also used, for fixing of pre-fabricated mounting frames onto the
foundation.
g NOTE
4 mounting plates with the dimensions 96 x 96 mm are provided with a BS-241 II
shelter type no. S30861-C2028-X-9 for fixing to the foundation or base construction.
Each M12 bolt has to be equipped with a mounting plate in addition to the washers.
4 washers acc. to ISO 7094 respectively DIN 440 R for bolts M12 with an outer
diameter of 45 mm are provided with the shelter type no. S30861-C4058 and has to
be used for fixing the shelter to the foundation or base construction.
dowel supplier: UPAT Fischer
dowel UTA-S M12 E TA M 12
drilling diameter 15 mm 18 mm
hole depth 90 mm 105 mm
bolt M12x60 M12x80
washer 14 DIN 434 14 DIN 434
washer A13 DIN 125 A13 DIN 125
Table 2 Recommended fixing material for BS-241 / 241 II on foundation
36 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d8058071e1ae
Shelter installation
Figure 18 Drilling template of the BS-241 / 241 II plinth
Figure 19 Fixing of BS-241 II shelters onto a concrete foundation
700 mm
d = 14.5 mm / 16 mm
3)
52.5 mm
4
7
0

m
m
595 mm
5
2
.
5

m
m
3
7
7

m
m
6
0

m
m
1
)
140 mm
420 mm
2
0
0

m
m
2
)
1) maximum length
2) recommended distance between plinth and wall for mounting
rear of plinth
3) 14,5 mm for BS-241, 16 mm in case of BS-241 II
2
9
.
5

m
m
4
)
front of plinth
4) cabinet overhang in case of BS241 (MEF shelter) and BS-241II
of a sound absorber
bolt M12 plate 96 mm x 96 mm
washer
washer d= 45 mm
concrete foundation dowel
shelter type no. S30861-C2028-X-9 shelter type no. S30861-C4058
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

37
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter installation
Id:0900d8058071e1ae
2.7.2 Mounting with mounting frames
Pre-fabricated steel frames can be used for mounting the shelters and to provide space
below the cabinets for the cable routing.
Two types of mounting frames are designed as an interface between the
customers foundation or base construction and the shelters.
g NOTE
The mounting frames are not part of the installastition material, delivered with the
shelter. They have to be fabricated by a local supplier.
g NOTE
4 mounting plates with the dimensions 96 x 96 mm are provided with a BS-241 II
shelter type no. S30861-C2028-X-9 for fixing to the foundation or base construction.
Each M12 bolt has to be equipped with a mounting plate in addition to the washers.
4 washers acc. to ISO 7094 respectively DIN 440 R for bolts M12 with an outer
diameter of 45 mm are provided with the shelter type no. S30861-C4058 and has to
be used for fixing the shelter to the foundation or base construction.
Figure 20 displays a proposal with basic informations of both mounting frame variants.
The recommended material for manufacturing is profile steel U 140 DIN 1026 ST 50-2.
Figure 20 Mounting frames and configuration example
700 mm
5
7
5

m
m
1400 mm
5
7
5

m
m
single shelter frame double shelter frame
1
4
0

m
m
420 mm
575 mm
6
0

m
m
A
A
single /double shelter frame
view A - A
single
shelter frame double shelter frame double shelter frame double shelter frame
extension
shelter 2
extension
shelter 1
base shelter service
shelter 1
service
shelter 2
service
shelter 3
service
shelter 4
space for cable routing
38 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d8058071e1ae
Shelter installation
Mounting frames as described or a compatible metal construction have to be used on
concrete foundations without cable channel.
Insert the four screws (M12) for fixing of the shelter to the mounting-frame into the plinth
from below. The screws must be fastened with appropriate washers (B13) and nuts
(M12). The using of additional lock nuts is a recommended security measure.
The BS 241 / BS-241 II requires the following distances from walls, buildings etc.:
Right side panel to wall approx. 400 mm for 120 door opening.
Left side panel to wall approx. 800 mm for the possibility of later extension and for
routing the cables below the shelters.
Recommended distance between plinth and wall behind the shelters of 800 mm to
allow the later mounting of a sound absorber (minimum distance: 200 mm).
An area with a minimum depth of 1100 mm in front of the shelters for installation and
maintenance activities.
Additional space, depending on the minimum bending radius of the antenna jumpers
on the left or right is needed.
400 mm above the roof line for removal of the roof (BS-241 only).
Figure 21 Minimum floorspace for BS-241 / 241 II installation
400 mm
200 mm minimum distance rear (plinth) to wall
*)
1
1
0
0

m
m
700 mm
*)
a distance of approx. 800 mm is recommended
to allow the later installation of a sound absorber to reduce
the acoustic noise emission in noise sensitive areas
Service1B Base
Extension
100 mm
**)
**)
reduced free space in the rear of the Service1B shelter
by its overlap of 99 mm
6
8
5

m
m
7
5
7

m
m
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

39
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter installation
Id:0900d8058071e1ae
2.8 Mechanical connections between the shelters
For cable routing from one shelter into the adjoined one (e.g., heating, DC power supply,
CAN-Bus) without leaving the EMC-shielded enclosure, an inter-connection hole in both
sidewalls is provided.
The holes are covered with plates. For installation of the inter-shelter cabling it is nec-
essary to remove the plates of the adjoining shelter walls.
The installation of the cables can be started, after all shelters are connected together
with the EMC/IP connection kits.
The row of shelters have to be fixed to the foundation or base construction as described
in section 2.7 of this manual.
2.8.1 EMC/IP connection between HEX-shelters (BS-241 only)
For the connection of shelter-types, equipped with heat exchangers (Siemens serial no.
S30861-C2002-X-3 and S30861-C2002-X-4), the connecting kit with Siemens serial no.
S30861-K2015-X has to be used.
Mount the kit in steps as follows (displayed in the following figure):
1. Remove the cover plates from those shelters, that should be connected.
2. Slide the smaller sealing ring (1) onto the tube (2) and fit the bigger sealing ring (3)
into the slot around the flange (4).
3. Shift one of the flanges onto the tube (2).
4. Insert the tube in the interconnection hole between the shelters.
5. Position the flange at the shelter wall and fix it loosely with 4 screws of the screw
pack (5).
6. Slide in the adjoined shelter the second sealing ring (1) onto the tube.
7. Shift the second flange onto the tube in the correct position and fix it with the other
4 screws without a gap at the shelters wall.
8. Fasten the screws of the first flange completely.
40 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d8058071e1ae
Shelter installation
Figure 22 Assembly of the connection kit for BS-241 HEX-shelters
2.8.2 EMC/IP connection between MEF-shelters
For the connection of MEF-shelters, two types of EMC/IP connection kits are available:
EMC/IP connection kit S3086-K2073-X for the connection between BS-241 shelters.
EMC/IP connection kit S3086-K4148-X for the connection between BS-241 and
BS-241II shelters and adjoining BS-241II shelters.
Figure 23 Parts of the EMCIP connection kit S30861-K2073-X
1
1
2
2 3
3
4
4
5
ground angle
pair of brackets
EMC/IP sealing ring
fitting pin
lable
cable protection profile
adhesive tape
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

41
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter installation
Id:0900d8058071e1ae
Figure 24 Parts of the EMCIP connection kit S30861-K4148-X
For installation of the mechanical connections proceed with steps as described in the
following sections.
2.8.2.1 EMC/IP connection between BS-241 MEF-shelters
1. Affix the first shelter to the foundation or to the mounting frame as described in
section 2.7.1 and 2.7.2 of this manual.
2. Remove the 4 hexagonal screws around the shelters inter-connection hole. Use a
socket wrench SW7. Remove the cover plate.
Figure 25 Opening of the shelters inter-connection hole
ground plate
pair of brackets
EMC/IP sealing ring
fitting pin
lable
cable protection profile
screws
rubber washers
adhesive tape
42 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d8058071e1ae
Shelter installation
Figure 26 Setup of the EMC/IP sealing ring
1. Remove the protection foil of the 4 adhesive tapes of the sealing ring.
2. Place the sealing ring around the inter-connection hole.
3. Cover the sharp edge of the hole with the rubber protection profile.
4. Open the inter-connection hole of the following shelter in the same manner and
setup the second cable protection profile.
Figure 27 Preparation of the plinth
1. Replace the Torx screw in the side panel of the shelters plinth by the fitting pin.
EMC/IP sealing ring
cable protection profile
Torx screw T40
Remove the bolts
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

43
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter installation
Id:0900d8058071e1ae
2. Unscrew both bolts in the side panel of the plinth by removal of the nuts inside the
plinth. Use a ratched with SW17 inset.
3. Remove the Torx screw and the bolts in the plinth of the second shelter in the same
way.
4. Insert the first bracket into the plinth of the first shelter, so that both bolts of the
bracket are fitted through the holes of the plinth (diameter 13 mm).
5. Setup the rubber washers on the bolts outside the plinth.
6. Setup the second shelter onto the surface of the base construction and shift the
shelter closed together to the first one, so that the bracket bolts are fitted through the
holes in the shelter plinth.
7. After the second shelter is in the correct position, setup the other bracket inside the
plinth of the shelter.
8. Tighten both screws with a ratched SW15, so that the shelters are screwed together
to one common unit without gap.
9. Perform the same steps with all following shelters.
Figure 28 Bracket inside the shelter plinth
The ground angle has to be used to connect the screws at the corners of adjoining shel-
ters. Mount the angle as shown in the following figure.
bracket
tighten the nut by ratched SW17
!
CAUTION
The ground connection provided by the ground angle between the shelteris needed
always. No other mechanical connection guarantees a proper ground connection.
44 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d8058071e1ae
Shelter installation
Figure 29 Mounting of the ground angle
2.8.2.2 EMC/IP connection between BS-241 II shelters
1. Affix the first shelter to the foundation or to the mounting frame as described in
section 2.7.1 and 2.7.2 of this manual.
2. Remove the 4 hexagonal screws around the shelter interconnection hole. Use a
socket wrench SW7.
3. Remove the cover plate.
4. Press out the shelters foam insulation as shown in the figure below.
Figure 30 Opening of the shelter interconnection hole
1. Remove the protection foil of the 4 adhesive tapes of the sealing ring.
2. Place the sealing ring around the inter-connection hole.
3. Cover the sharp edge of the hole with the protection profile.
4. Open the inter-connection hole of the following shelter in the same manner and
setup the second protection profile.
5. Replace the plastic screw in the side panel of the shelter plinth by the fitting pin.
6. Unscrew both bolts in the side panel of the plinth by removal of the nuts inside the
plinth. Use a ratched with SW15 inset.
7. Remove the plastic screw and the bolts in plinth of the second shelter in the same
way.
8. Insert the first bracket into the plinth of the first shelter, so that both bolts of the
bracket are fitted through the holes of the plinth (diameter 13 mm).
9. Setup the rubber washers on the bolts outside the plinth.
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

45
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter installation
Id:0900d8058071e1ae
10. Setup the second shelter onto the surface of the base construction and shift the
shelter closed together to the first one, so that the bracket bolts are fitted through the
holes in the shelter plinth.
11. After the second shelter is in the correct position, setup the other bracket inside the
plinth of the shelter.
12. Tighten both nuts with a ratched SW15, so that the shelters are screwed together to
one common unit without gap.
13. Perform the same steps with all following shelters.
Figure 31 Preparation for mounting of the bracket
Figure 32 Mounting of the bracket inside the plinth
The ground connection plate will be used for connecting the metal studs at the bottom
left and right corners of the adjoining shelters. These ground studs (M8) are internally
connected to the PE-terminal of the shelter.
unscrew the plastic screw
unscrew the nuts inside the plinth
!
CAUTION
The ground connection provided by the ground angle between the shelteris needed
always. No other mechanical connection guarantees a proper ground connection.
46 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d8058071e1ae
Shelter installation
Figure 33 Ground connection between BS-241 II shelters
2.8.2.3 EMC/IP connection of the BS-241 with BS-241 II shelters
The already installed BS-241 shelters on site can be extended with BS-241 II shelters.
The preparation of the shelters for setup of the EMC/IP connection is described in the
sections 2.8.2.1 and 2.8.2.2 of this manual.
Because the different design of the shelters, especially of the ground points with screws
at the left and right shelter corners (ground point parallel to the shelters front / ground
point with a 45 angle towards the shelters front), the ground strap C50324-A200-C401
has to be used. Perform the following steps:
1. Replace the hexagon socket head cap screw at the BS-241 shelter with the enclo-
sured hexagon head screw.
2. Shift the ground strap with the open-end cutout between the contact washer and the
normal washer and tighten the screw stoutly.
3. Remove the ground screw and the washers at the adjoining BS-241 II shelter.
4. Align the BS-241 II shelter to the BS-241 shelter.
5. Affix the ground strap to the BS-241 II shelter with the removed screw and washers.
The teeth of the contact washer must be point towards the shelters plinth.
6. Tighten the screws at both shelters.
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

47
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter installation
Id:0900d8058071e1ae
2.8.3 Connection between different shelter types
For aligning the shelter type ...-X5 (MEF-shelter of the BS-241) and BS-241 II shelters
to shelters of type ...-X3 or ...-X4 (HEX-shelter of the BS-241), two fixing holes of 13 mm
in diameter have to be drilled into the plinth of the X3 / X4 shelters.
After the drilling of a pilot hole with a taper or counter bore, the 13 mm holes can be
drilled by hand.
The drilling holes needs no rust proofing compound because the material of the plinth is
made of stainless steel.
The drilling of holes and a screw connection between HEX-shelter and MEF-shelter is
not necessary if the connection kit S30861-K2015-X with tube will be used.
Figure 34 Drilling sketch for the plinth of HEX-shelter
470
52.5
25
diameter 13 mm
front side
rear side
sketch without scale
48 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805805aefac
External cabling activities
3 External cabling activities
This chapter provides information required for installing the external cables between the
BS-241 / 241 II and equipment outside the shelter.
The shelter cannot function without the following cable connections:
AC mains terminal block (MSU:AC) - > connection point of AC mains supply
DC mains terminal block (MSU:DC) -> external -48 V power supply
Ground bolts -> site grounding system
Abis interface -> PCM links (via NTPM in case of terrestrial lines)
Microwave indoor units -> W outdoor units (if W equipment is used for transmis-
sion)
Transmit / receive antenna connectors -> antenna system
Ground strip of antenna cables shields -> ground bar
optional:
Serial interface -> signalling link terminal
Operator alarm interface -> external alarm sensors
All interfaces are located behind the front cover of the plinth. The front covers are remov-
able, this allows the manipulation of cables, that to be fitted through the IP-panel into the
plinth.
Remove the front covers of the BS-241 according to figure below:
1. Open the shelter door.
2. Unscrew the fixing screw of the front cover (1).
3. Flap back the front cover (2) and disconnect the ground wire.
4. Remove the front cover (3). Avoid damages of the paint coat.
Figure 35 Removal of plinth front covers BS-241
The opening and the removal of the plinth covers of the BS-241 II is nearly equal to the
procedure as described for the BS-241 shelter.
1. Unscrew the fixing screws of the front cover (1).
2. Flap back the front cover (2).
3. Disconnect the ground wire from the front covers pin.
4. Remove the front cover (3). Avoid damages of the paint coat.
1
2
3
front cover
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

49
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B External cabling activities
Id:0900d805805aefac
Remove the front covers of the BS-241 II according to figure below.
Figure 36 Removal of plinth front cover BS-241 II
Figure 37 Disconnection of the ground wire
The bottom of the plinth contains a module allowing the feeding of cables with a
diameter between 8 and 22 mm into the shelter and protects the shelter from water and
dust. The cable feeding module allows the routing of cables in a width of 420 mm.
Figure 38 Opening of the cable feeding module of BS-241 (1)
1
2
3
3
disconnect
1 2
loosen
loosen
50 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805805aefac
External cabling activities
Figure 39 Opening of the cable feeding module of BS-241 (2)
To open the cable feeding module of the BS-241 II shelter proceed as follows:
Loosen the screw at the left and right edge.
Loosen the 4 wing nuts of the modules movable part.
Slide the movable part to front.
The rubber lids of the cable feeding module are equipped with removable pieces, in
order to allow the routing of cables with different diameters without a gap between the
cable and the rubber lids.
All cables have to be fixed at the stress-relieving bracket with cable ties or lacing twine.
In addition, two clamps are provided for fixing of thicker cables (e.g. power supply
cables).
Figure 40 Opening of the cable feeding module of BS-241 II
3
4
loosen
slide back
loosen the screws
loosen the
4 wing nuts
slide to front
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

51
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B External cabling activities
Id:0900d805805aefac
Figure 41 Cable routing at the cable feeding module BS-241 II
3.1 Ground connection
The shelters have to be connected to the site specific ground system before starting the
connection of the AC supply cable.
All adjoining shelters must be grounded using a ground screw and will be connected to
the bottom left and right corners of each shelter respectively. These ground screws (M8)
are internally connected to the PE-plate of the shelter.
The ground system in buildings must comply with the standards IEC 62305-1.
A ground cable (16 mm2, type S-07V-K) has to be connected at the M8 ground screw,
located at the lower left side of the service shelter.
The ground bolt is connected via an internal ground cable inside the shelter plinth with
the PE-plate at the EMI panel.
Figure 42 Connection of the ground wire
52 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805805aefac
External cabling activities
Connect the shelters and ground system as follows:
1. Use the nearest connection point of the ground system.
2. Measure the distance between the connection point of the ground system and the
ground bolt of the shelter.
3. Cut the cable to the required length.
4. Remove 10 mm of the cable insulation at both ends.
5. Shift a 55 mm piece of heat shrink tube (e.g. Versafit 1/2-9-SP) onto both cable
ends.
6. Fix a double crimped cable lug M8 at both cable ends.
7. Shrink on the tubes, so that the crimped part of the cable lugs are well covered
8. Connect the prepared cable between shelter and ground bar.
9. Firmly tighten the screws.
g NOTE
In case of a stand-alone shelter of the BS-241 IIB, the shelter has to be grounded
separately at the ground bar as described above. Shelters mounted in a row close
together without a gap must be connected with ground bands S30864-X210-A01.
3.2 AC supply connection (3-phase) BS-241 / 241 II
The 5-pole terminal block of the MSU, located in the plinth of Service 1 / Service1A
shelter, is the connection point for the AC mains cable.
The base station will be powered by 3 x 230 V, 50 Hz. A circuit breaker 25 A (BS-241)
or 32 A (BS-241 II) has to be installed per phase in the external AC-distribution.
g NOTE
For selection of the external AC breakers characteristic, pay attention to the fact,
that all internal AC and DC breakers of the shelters are of type C.
The disconnect device shall disconnect simultaneously all phase conductors of the
supply cable.
For equipment requiring a neutral connection to an IT power system, the disconnect
device shall be a four-pole device and shall disconnect all phase conductors and the
neutral conductor.
!
WARNING
This warning must appear in the original German text:
Vor Anschlu des 3 x 230 V Einspeisungskabels ist sicherzustellen, da das Kabel
spannungsfrei ist. Die Hauptsicherungen sind zu unterbrechen. Es sind geeignete Ma-
nahmen gegen unbefugtes Einschalten der Netzspannung zu treffen.
!
WARNING
AC supplied BTS versions,remotely disconnected from power supply:
The service personnel must make sure that the external AC circuit breakers (disonnect
device) of the relevant base station, that is remotely disconnected from external power,
are switched OFF before beginning with any service / maintenance activities. This is to
deenergize the system reliably (electrical shock hazards).
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

53
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B External cabling activities
Id:0900d805805aefac
The following figure shows the recommended cabling for the power supply and ground
connections.
Figure 43 AC mains and ground connections
Before connecting the Service1 / Service1A shelter with the AC mains distribution
perform the following steps first:
1. Unscrew the front cover of the Service1 / Service1A shelters plinth and remove the
cover carefully.
2. Refer to the site documentation for informations about type and location of the AC
distribution.
3. Measure the actual distance between the terminal block and AC distribution.
3.2.1 AC supply connection (variant 1)
Connect the AC supply cable at the 5-pole terminal block of the MSU as follows:
1. Cut the cable to the required length. Note: The protection earth wire (PE) should be
approx. 2 cm longer than the L1, L2, L3 and the N wire.
2. Remove 15 cm of the outer insulation of the cable and cut back 15 mm of the wire
insulation at the end; that is to be connected to the terminal block.
3. Lead the cable through the cable feeding module at the bottom of the shelter.
4. Fix the cables at the strain relief by the clamp.
5. Insert the wires into the terminals and check that all wires are in fixed position.
6. Lead the mains cable to the connection point of AC mains distribution.
3 x 230 V AC mains
AC
3 x 25 A main breakers (BS-241)
connection to ground
1) NYY-I 5 x 4 mm
2
ground bar
ground wire 16 mm
2
3 x 32 A main breakers (BS-241 II)
1) cross section depends on the distance between external breaker and MSU
(50 mm
2
)
earth angle (BS-241)
earth plate (BS-241 II)
-distribution
-counter
(external fusing)
54 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805805aefac
External cabling activities
Figure 44 Wiring of the MSU:AC terminals
3.2.2 AC supply connection (variant 2)
Connect the AC supply cable at the 5-pole terminal block of the MSU as follows:
1. Cut the cable to the required length.
2. Remove 15 cm of the outer insulation of the cable.
3. Remove 15 mm of the wires insulation.
4. Lead the cable through the cable feeding module at the bottom of the shelter.
5. Fix the cables at the strain relief by the clamp.
6. Connect the wires at the matching terminals of the MSU.The protection earth wire
(PE) should be approx. 2 cm longer than the L1, L2, L3 and the N wire.
7. Lead the mains cable to the connection point of AC mains distribution.
N L1
L2 L3 PE
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

55
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B External cabling activities
Id:0900d805805aefac
Figure 45 Terminal assignment of the MSU
3.3 AC supply connection (single phase) BS-241 II
The terminal block of the MSU, located in the plinth of the BS-241 II Service1A shelter,
is the connection point for the AC mains cable.
The base station will be powered by 230 V, 50 Hz, single phase. An external circuit
breaker 80 A has to be fitted in the phase conductor of the AC supply cable.
For equipment requiring a neutral connection to an IT power system, the disconnect
device shall be shall disconnect the phase conductor and the neutral conductor.
g NOTE
If the AC supply of the BS-241 II should be changed from 3-phase supply to single
phase supply, the mounting kit MK:AC3_1PHV1 (S30861-K4272-X) is needed. The
number of AC/DC converters is limited to 5. If the Service1A shelter is equipped with
6 AC/DC converters, one converter has to be pulled out. The empty slot in the
AC/DC frame has to be closed with a cover part CP:ACDCDV1 (S30861-K4056-X).
L1 L2 L3 N PE
!
WARNING
This warning must appear in the original German text:
Vor Anschlu des 3 x 230 V Einspeisungskabels ist sicherzustellen, da das Kabel
spannungsfrei ist. Die Hauptsicherungen sind zu unterbrechen. Es sind geeignete Ma-
nahmen gegen unbefugtes Einschalten der Netzspannung zu treffen.
!
WARNING
AC supplied BTS versions,remotely disconnected from power supply:
The service personnel must make sure that the external AC circuit breakers (disonnect
device) of the relevant base station, that is remotely disconnected from external power,
are switched OFF before beginning with any service / maintenance activities. This is to
deenergize the system reliably (electrical shock hazards).
56 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805805aefac
External cabling activities
Perform the reconstruction works in accordance with the instructions, delivered with
the MK:AC3_1PHV1.
The following figure shows the recommended cabling for the AC single phase supply
connections.
Figure 46 AC mains connections, BS-241 II, single phase
Connect the AC supply cable at the terminal block of the MSU as follows:
1. Cut the cable to the required length.
2. Remove 15 cm of the outer insulation of the cable.
3. Remove 15 mm of the insulation of all wires.
4. Lead the cable through the cable feeding module at the bottom of the shelter.
5. Fix the cables at the strain relief by the clamp.
6. Connect the wires at the matching terminals of the MSU. The protection earth wire
(PE) should be approx. 2 cm longer than the L1 and the N wire.
7. Lead the mains cable to the connection point of AC mains distribution.
230 V AC mains
AC
80 A main breaker
connection to ground
1) NYY-I 3 x 16 mm
2
ground bar
ground wire 16 mm
2
1) cross section needed depends on the
(50 mm
2
)
earth plate
-distribution
-counter
(external fusing)
distance between external breaker and MSU
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

57
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B External cabling activities
Id:0900d805805aefac
Figure 47 Terminal assignment of the MSU
3.4 AC supplied BS-241 IIB
The MSU is located at the lefthand side panel of theService 1B shelter, accessible after
removal or the protection cap. The terminals of the MSU allow the the connection of
wires with a max. cross section of 21 mm2. The cross section needed depends on the
distance between the MSU and the external breakers.
A circuit breaker 32 A has to be installed per phase in the external AC-distribution in
case of 3 phase supply.
A circuit breaker 80 A has to be installed per phase in the external AC-distribution in
case of single phase supply. The terminals L1, N, PE of the MSU will be used for con-
nection of the AC supply cable.
g NOTE
For selection of the external AC breakers characteristic, pay attention to the fact,
that all internal AC and DC breakers of the shelters are of type C.
L1 N PE
!
WARNING
This warning must appear in the original German text:
Vor Anschlu des 3 x 230 V Einspeisungskabels ist sicherzustellen, da das Kabel
spannungsfrei ist. Die Hauptsicherungen sind zu unterbrechen. Es sind geeignete Ma-
nahmen gegen unbefugtes Einschalten der Netzspannung zu treffen.
58 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805805aefac
External cabling activities
Connect the AC supply cable at the 5-pole terminal block of the MSU as follows:
1. Cut the cable to the required length. Note: The protection earth wire (PE) should be
approx. 2 cm longer than the L1, L2, L3 and the N wire.
2. Remove 15 cm of the outer insulation of the cable and cut back 15 mm of the wire
insulation at the end; that is to be connected to the terminal block.
3. Lead the cable through the cable feeding module at the bottom of the shelter.
4. Fix the cable with 2 cable ties at the shelters bottom section (see figure).
5. Insert the wires into the terminals and check that all wires are in fixed position.
6. Lead the mains cable to the connection point of AC mains distribution.
Figure 48 Terminal assignment of the MSU
!
WARNING
AC supplied BTS versions,remotely disconnected from power supply:
The service personnel must make sure that the external AC circuit breakers (disonnect
device) of the relevant base station, that is remotely disconnected from external power,
are switched OFF before beginning with any service / maintenance activities. This is to
deenergize the system reliably (electrical shock hazards).
service socket 230 V / 10 A
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

59
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B External cabling activities
Id:0900d805805aefac
Figure 49 Routing of the AC supply cable
g NOTE
Before starting the AC power supply connection, connect the shelters with the
ground bar on site as described in section AC Power supplied BS-240 / BS-241 II
Shelters.
3.5 DC supplied BS-241 II (BS-241 II DC)
The BS-241 II can be powered by an external power supply source with - 48 V voltage.
All shelter types are equipped with a 2-pole main supply unit (MSU:DC).
The shelters to be connected with the -48 V DC supply directly in star configuration as
shown in the following figure.
g NOTE
Before starting the DC power supply connections, connect the shelters with the
ground bar on site as described in section AC Power supplied BS-240 / BS-241 II
Shelters.
AC supply cable
fix here with cable ties
60 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805805aefac
External cabling activities
Figure 50 Overview of the DC supply and ground connections
g NOTE
In case of a DC supplied BS-240II Base and Extension Shelter, an external DC
circuit breaker with a (recommended) minimum rating of 80A has to be fitted per
shelter (see figure above). The maximum rating is 100A if an OEM external power
supply Shelter requires it.
g NOTE
For selection of the external AC breakers characteristic, pay attention to the fact,
that all internal AC and DC breakers of the shelters are of type C.
Connect the BS-241 II with the DC mains distribution as follows:
1. Unscrew the front cover of the plinth and remove the cover carefully.
2. Refer to the site documentation for informations about type and location of the DC
distribution.
3. Measure the actual distance between the MSU terminal block and DC distribution.
4. Cut the cables to the required length.
5. Route the DC supply through the metal tubes between the external DC supply unit
and the shelters. If necessary use suitable routing aids.
6. Remove the insulation of the cable and cut back the wire insulation at the end; that
is to be connected to the MSU terminal block.
7. Lead the cables through the cable feeding module at the bottom of the shelters.
8. Fix the cables at the strain relief with cable ties.
9. Insert the wires into the terminals and check that all wires are in fixed position.
10. Connect the DC supply cables at the -48 V DC distribution panel.
connection to ground
2x H07V-R 35 mm
2
ground bar
ground wire 16 mm
2
*) cross section needed depends on the distance between external breaker and

(50 mm
2
)
earth plates
- 48 V DC
power
supply
unit
100 A breaker
per shelter **)
2x H07V-R 35 mm
2
1)
The DC supply cables must be routed in metal tubes over the whole cable run
connected to equipment cabinet ground at both ends by short copper wires
backup
batteries
(external fusing)
with a cross section of 16 mm
2
!
routed in metal tube
DC-MSU
from the DC power plant to the BS-241 shelters. These tubes must be
**) minimum breaker rating 80 A
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

61
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B External cabling activities
Id:0900d805805aefac
Figure 51 Wiring of the MSU:DC terminals
g NOTE
The DC supplied version of the BS-241 II is equipped with heaters and tangential
blowers. The temperature management board (TMB) located on the right side of the
middle subpart (see the following Fig.) provides two separate push buttons for
testing the function of these equipment parts.
Heater and blower remains connected to DC while the relevant button is pressed.
g NOTE
The switching OFF of the Temperature Management Board means switching OFF
of the complete BTS system.
Figure 52 Temperature management board (TMB)
+ 0 V -48 V
BR09 for switching OFF TMB
Test push button for heater
Test push button for heater fan
BR10 for switching OFF heater
62 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805805aefac
External cabling activities
3.6 DC supplied BS-241 IIB
The BS-241 IIB can be powered by an external power supply source with - 48 V voltage.
All shelter types are equipped with a 2-pole main supply unit (MSU:DC).
The shelters to be connected with the -48 V DC supply directly in star configuration as
shown in the following figure.
g NOTE
Before starting the DC power supply connections, connect the shelters with the
ground bar on site as described in section AC Power supplied BS-240 / BS-241 II
Shelters.
g NOTE
In case of DC supplied BS-240IIB Base and Extension Shelters, an external DC
circuit breaker with a (recommended) minimum rating of 80A has to be fitted per
shelter (see figure above). The maximum rating is 100A if an OEM external power
supply Shelter requires it.
g NOTE
For selection of the external AC breakers characteristic, pay attention to the fact,
that all internal AC and DC breakers of the shelters are of type C.
Connect the BS-241 II with the DC mains distribution as follows:
1. Unscrew the front cover of the plinth and remove the cover carefully.
2. Refer to the site documentation for informations about type and location of the DC
distribution.
3. Measure the actual distance between the MSU terminal block and DC distribution.
4. Cut the cables to the required length.
5. Route the DC supply through the metal tubes between the external DC supply unit
and the shelters. If necessary use suitable routing aids.
6. Remove the insulation of the cable and cut back the wire insulation at the end; that
is to be connected to the MSU terminal block.
7. Lead the cables through the cable feeding module at the bottom of the shelters.
8. Fix the cables at the strain relief with cable ties.
9. Insert the wires into the terminals and check that all wires are in fixed position.
10. Connect the DC supply cables at the -48 V DC distribution panel.
!
CAUTION
The external -48 VDC supply unit must be connected with an appropriate back-up
battery system, in order to ensure fast release of the external main fuse / breaker in case
of an internal DC shortcut.
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

63
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B External cabling activities
Id:0900d805805aefac
Figure 53 Terminals for connection of the DC supply cable
g NOTE
The Base and Extension shelters of the BS-241 II can be equipped with heaters and
tangential blowers. The temperature management board (TMB) located in the DC
panel testing the function of these equipment parts.
Heater and blower remains connected to DC while the relevant button is pressed.
g NOTE
The switching OFF of the Temperature Management Board means switching OFF
of the complete BTS system.
3.7 Abis-interface - PCM link terminal
The Abis interfaces PCM0 and PCM1, located on EMI panel, provides the communica-
tion links to the neighboring Base Stations or to the controlling BSC.
The Abis interface connection is available in two variants:
OVPT, with over-voltage protection
ABISCON, without over-voltage protection
ETHCON
g NOTE
-48 V
+0 V
!
CAUTION
The external -48 VDC supply unit must be connected with an appropriate back-up
battery system, in order to ensure fast release of the external main fuse / breaker in case
of an internal DC shortcut.
64 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805805aefac
External cabling activities
If the connection point for the Abis line (e.g. NTPM or microwave equipment) is
located outside of the Service1 / Service1A or Service2 Shelter, an OVPT module
has to be installed always.
Two types of OVPT exist: OVPTCOAX for 75 coaxial cables and OVPT for 120
symmetric cables.
Without overvoltage protection, if this function is not needed, the ABISCON for 120
or the ABISCONCX for 75 PCM lines has to be used.
Depending on the different cable impedances it is recommended to use:
1. Screened cable containing 8/10 twisted pairs 0,25 mm2 for 120 PCM lines, e.g.
S-09YS(ST)CY 8x2x0.6/1.2
2. Coaxial cables for 75 wiring, e.g. 2YCCY 0.4/2.5
g NOTE
Use only twisted pair or coaxial copper cables with braided shielding!
The maximum cable length depends on the attenuation of the cable, in order to fulfill the
requirements of minimum voltage levels to be provided at Abis interface according to
PCM standards. The cable shields must be connected to the relevant ground pins as
close as possible (in order to avoid EMC/RF interfering effects).
g NOTE
The ABISCONCX / OVPTCOAX boards have delicate 1.0/2.3 connectors (e.g. the
PCM line connectors in Figure 61) and monitoring interface connectors (see Figure
62).
Please make sure that the wires and cables at these connectors are not under
mechanical tension use suitable stress relief measures!
g NOTE
The replacement of the OVPT lightning surge arresters is described in the respec-
tive Nonstandard Maintenance manual (see Nonstandard Maintenance documenta-
tion CD).
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

65
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B External cabling activities
Id:0900d805805aefac
3.7.1 Abis-interface for 120 Ohm cables
Before starting the connection of the PCM cables at the Abis interface of the OVPT or
ABISCON prepare the cables as shown in the figure below.
Figure 54 Preparation of the PCM-cable, 120 impedance
1. Cut the cable to the required length (1).
2. Cut back the outer insulation approx.13 cm (2).
3. Remove approx. 11 cm of the braided shield (3).
4. Cut around the outer insulation and shift the insulation ring to the end of the braided
shield (4). Remove the foil shields and the additional plastic wires.
5. Remove 6 mm of the wires insulation (5).
6. For connection of the cables loosen the screws as shown in the following figures.
Figure 55 Access to the Abis interfaces (BS-241)
1 5 4 3
2
unscrew
66 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805805aefac
External cabling activities
Figure 56 Access to the Abis interfaces (BS-241 II)
It is not necessary to disconnect the internal PCM cables.
Take the plate carrying the OVPT / ABISCON out and twist it in connection position. Fix
the prepared cables at the stress relieving bracket with cable ties, so that the exposed
cable screen has proper ground contact to the bracket.
Figure 57 Connection of the PCM-cable (OVPT for 120 Ohm impedance)
1. Insert the wires into the spring terminals of the OVPT / ABISCON.
2. Insert the additional wire (shielding potential) into one of the ground terminals (e.g.,
no. 24).
3. Lead the additional wire and the uplink and downlink wires on the shortest way (that
means without loops) between the stress relieving and the spring terminals.
4. Connect all unused PCM lines (2 wires per line) to one of the ground terminals.
5. Twist back the plate in its original mounting position and fix it with the 6 screws.
unscrew
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

67
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B External cabling activities
Id:0900d805805aefac
Figure 58 Wiring of the Abis interface PCM 0
Figure 59 Wiring of the Abis interface PCM 1
g NOTE
The pin arrangement of the OVPT is equal to the ABISCON.
1 3
2 4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
B A
B A
B A
A B
B A B A B A
A B
PCM 4 PCM 3 PCM 2
PCM 1
Down Link = RX
Up Link = TX
25
26
27
28
E
X
T

S
Y
N
C

B
E
X
T

S
Y
N
C

A
1 3
2 4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
B A B A B A A B
B A B A B A
A B
PCM 8 PCM 7 PCM 6
PCM 5
Down Link = RX
Up Link = TX
25
26
27
28
68 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805805aefac
External cabling activities
Figure 60 Connection of external PCM cables
3.7.2 Abis-interface for 75 Ohm cables
The Abis interface to the peripheral link equipment is done by the use of nine 1.0/2.3
coaxial connectors, located at the OVPTCOAX or ABISCONCX.
For Abis cabling with 75 impedance use coaxial cable, e.g. 2YCCY 0.4/2.5.
Figure 61 OVPT with 1.0/2.3 connectors (75 )
1. Attach a 1.0/2.3 male connector at each PCM up- and down link wire.
2. Plug the cable connectors into the connectors on OVPTCOAX or ABISCONCX.
3. Fix the cables at the holes for stress-relieving with cable ties.
PCM lines
holes for stress relieving
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

69
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B External cabling activities
Id:0900d805805aefac
g NOTE
The pin arrangement of the OVPTCOAX is equal to the wiring of the ABISCONCX.
3.7.3 Monitoring interfaces of OVPT / ABISCON
The OVPT / ABISCON carries three 6pin DIN41616 test connectors for monitoring the
PCM lines.The following tables show the wiring arrangement of the monitoring inter-
faces.
The pin arrangement is shown in the figure below.
Figure 62 Monitoring interfaces for PCM lines of OVPT / ABISCON
signal coax
connector
signal coax
connector
signal coax
connector
PCM1-ULA 1 PCM2-DLA 4 PCM4-ULA 7
PCM1-DLA 2 PCM3-ULA 5 PCM4-DLA 8
PCM2-ULA 3 PCM3-DLA 6 EXTSYNCA 9
Table 3 Wiring of Abis interface PCM0, 75
signal coax
connector
signal coax
connector
signal coax
connector
PCM5-ULA 1 PCM6-DLA 4 PCM8-ULA 7
PCM5-DLA 2 PCM7-ULA 5 PCM8-DLA 8
PCM6-ULA 3 PCM7-DLA 6
Table 4 Wiring of Abis interface PCM1, 75
1 2
3 4
5 6
1 2
3 4
5 6
1 2
3 4
5 6
connector 3
connector 2
connector 1
Testconn.-pin Signal Testconn.-pin Signal
1- 1 PCM 1 - ULA 2- 5 PCM 3 - DLA
Table 5 Wiring of the monitoring interfaces PCM0
70 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805805aefac
External cabling activities
3.7.4 Abis-interface with ETHCON
The ETHCON module allows the connection of Abis lines with copper wires via two Fast
Ethernet interfaces (FE0, FE1) and optical cables via the two optical interfaces (SFP2,
SFP3). The ETHCON is always fitted at the SubD25 plug-in position PCM 0 as this
connector is the interface to the core module CESCOBA. The ETHCON can only imple-
mented in conjunction with this type of core module.
g NOTE
Fast Ethernet 100BTX solution is restricted to indoor use. For outdoor BTS or cable
links that leave the building, the optical interfaces, SFP2&SFP3 ports shall be used.
The following figure gives imformation of the connector arrangement of the ETHCON
module.
1- 2 PCM 1 - UL 2- 6 PCM 3 - DLB
1- 3 PCM 1 - DLA 3- 1 PCM 4 - ULA
1- 4 PCM 1 - DLB 3- 2 PCM 4 - ULB
1- 5 PCM 2 - ULA 3- 3 PCM 4- DLA
1- 6 PCM 2 - ULB 3- 4 PCM 4- DLB
2- 1 PCM 2 - DLA 3- 5 EXTSYNCA
2- 2 PCM 2 - DLB 3- 6 EXTSYNCB
2- 3 PCM 3 - ULA
2- 4 PCM 3 - ULB
Testconn.-pin Signal Testconn.-pin Signal
1- 1 PCM 5 - ULA 2- 5 PCM 7 - DLA
1- 2 PCM 5 - ULB 2- 6 PCM 7 - DLB
1- 3 PCM 5 - DLA 3- 1 PCM 8 - ULA
1- 4 PCM 5 - DLB 3- 2 PCM 8 - ULB
1- 5 PCM 6 - ULA 3- 3 PCM 8 - DLA
1- 6 PCM 6 - ULB 3- 4 PCM 8 - DLB
2- 1 PCM 6 - DLA 3- 5 ---
2- 2 PCM 6 - DLB 3- 6 ---
2- 3 PCM 7 - ULA
2- 4 PCM 7 - ULB
Table 6 Wiring of the monitoring interfaces PCM1
Testconn.-pin Signal Testconn.-pin Signal
Table 5 Wiring of the monitoring interfaces PCM0 (Cont.)
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

71
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B External cabling activities
Id:0900d805805aefac
Figure 63 Connector arrangement of the ETHCON module
For outdoor BTS, the 2 optical 100BFX interfaces SFP2 and SFP3 have to be used for
connections to other network elements.
The two interfaces are implemented so a 2nd BTS can be connected in a kind of
physical multidrop configuration.
For optical connections, duplex-fiber-optic cables with multimode fiber type according to
ISO/IEC9314-3 and LC-duplex plug according to IEC61754-20 have to be used.
g NOTE
Pay attention to the minimum bending radius of the optical cables. Fix the cables at
stress relieving facilitys with cable ties.
To allow the connection of fiber-optic cables, SFP-modules have to be inserted into the
cage of ports SFP2 & SFP3. The required SFP-module type has the part-number
V50017-U364-K500.
MonA
MonB
EXT_CLK SYN_C
EXT_CLK SYN_B
EXT_CLK SYN_A
GND
FE 0 FE1
SFP 2
SFP 3
stress relieving clip
ETHCON TRACE
72 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805805aefac
External cabling activities
Figure 64 ETHCON module, mounted inside the shelters plinth
The ETHCON module provides the possibility to connect external balanced or unbal-
anced clock signals to its spring terminal block. Therefore, twisted pair or coaxial copper
cables can be used.
The cables have to be fixed at the stress relieving clip of the ETHCON modules cover
part.
The terminal arrangement of the external clock interface EXTCLOCK is given in the fol-
lowing table.
signal terminal
no.
terminal
no.
signal
GND 2 1 Monitoring EXTSYNC A
EXT_CLK_SYNC_A 4 3 Monitoring EXTSYNC B
EXT_CLK_SYNC_B 6 5 EXT_CLK_SYNC_C
Table 7 Terminal arrangement for external clock connection
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

73
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B External cabling activities
Id:0900d805805aefac
Figure 65 ETHCON, external clock connection
The trace connector of the ETHCON allows the monitoring of ethernet traffic. Therefore,
a 2x6 pin, 1.27mm grid connector is provided.
An adapter called "ETHCON TRACE" (part-number S30861-U2530), that includes
ethernet magnetics and RJ45 connectors has to be attached to the trace connector. The
pinning of the RJ45 sockets is as shown in the following table.
signal pin pin signal
Logical Port 5 RXN A1 B1 Logical Port 5 RXP
Logical Port 5 TXP A2 B2 Logical Port 5 RX center
Logical Port 5 TX center A3 B3 Logical Port 5 TXN
Logical Port 4 TXN A4 B4 Logical Port 4 TXP
Logical Port 4 RXP A5 B5 Logical Port 4 TX center
Logical Port 4 RX center A6 B6 Logical Port 4 RXN
Table 8 ETHCON trace adapter ports, pin arrangement
terminal no.
1
2
3
4
5
6
wire bridge 0.8 mm
twisted pair cable
outer cable shield
terminal no.
1
2
3
4
5
6
wire bridge 0.8 mm
coaxial cable
outer cable shield
spring terminal block
74 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805805aefac
External cabling activities
Figure 66 ETHCON trace adapter
3.7.5 Abis-interface without OVPT / ABISCON / ETHCON
Without OVPT / ABISCON, a SUB-D25 female connector is the direct interface for the
PCM links.
g NOTE
Without OVPT or ABISCON no monitoring possibility is provided. Traces of the
BTSE Abis lines are only possible with a reset of the BTSE.
Port 4
Port 5
lug for temporary fixing
Pin no. SubD 25 Signal name Function
1 PCM 1 - ULA PCM Line 1 Up Link A
14 PCM 1 - ULB PCM Line 1 Up Link B
3 GND/G shield pair 1
2 PCM 1 - DLA PCM Line 1 Down Link A
15 PCM 1 - DLB PCM Line 1 Down Link B
3 GND/G shield pair 2
4 PCM 2 - ULA PCM Line 2 Up Link A
16 PCM 2 - ULB PCM Line 2 Up Link B
18 GND/G shield pair 3
5 PCM 2 - DLA PCM Line 2 Down Link A
17 PCM 2 - DLB PCM Line 2 Down Link B
18 GND/G shield pair 4
Table 9 Wiring of the PCM0 interface without OVPT (SubD 25 connector)
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

75
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B External cabling activities
Id:0900d805805aefac
6 PCM 3 - ULA PCM Line 3 Up Link A
19 PCM 3 - ULB PCM Line 3 Up Link B
8 GND/G shield pair 5
7 PCM 3 - DLA PCM Line 3 Down Link A
20 PCM 3 - DLB PCM Line 3 Down Link B
8 GND/G shield pair 6
9 PCM 4 - ULA PCM Line 4 Up Link A
21 PCM 4 - ULB PCM Line 4 Up Link B
11 GND/G shield pair 7
10 PCM 4 - DLA PCM Line 4 Down Link A
22 PCM 4 - DLB PCM Line 4 Down Link B
23 GND/G shield pair 8
12 EXTSYNCA
24 EXTSYNCB
25 GND/G
13 GND/G main cable shield
Pin no. SubD 25 Signal name Function
1 PCM 5 - ULA PCM Line 5 Up Link A
14 PCM 5- ULB PCM Line 5 Up Link B
3 GND/G shield pair 1
2 PCM 5 - DLA PCM Line 5 Down Link A
15 PCM 5 - DLB PCM Line 5Down Link B
3 GND/G shield pair 2
4 PCM 6 - ULA PCM Line 6 Up Link A
16 PCM 6 - ULB PCM Line 6 Up Link B
18 GND/G shield pair 3
5 PCM 6 - DLA PCM Line 6 Down Link A
17 PCM 6 - DLB PCM Line 6 Down Link B
18 GND/G shield pair 4
6 PCM 7 - ULA PCM Line 7 Up Link A
19 PCM 7 - ULB PCM Line 7 Up Link B
8 GND/G shield pair 5
Table 10 Wiring of the PCM1 interface without OVPT (SubD 25 connector)
Pin no. SubD 25 Signal name Function
Table 9 Wiring of the PCM0 interface without OVPT (SubD 25 connector) (Cont.)
76 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805805aefac
External cabling activities
3.8 Connection of external alarm sensors
3.8.1 Connection of external alarm sensors at ACTM
The interface for the cables of external alarm sensors is the Alarm Collection Terminal
(ACTM).
The ACTM provides 8 spring terminal blocks with 12 pins each for connecting of 48
external alarm sensors.
The terminals are labelled X1 ... X8. In addition, the terminal blocks X9 and X10 can be
used for the switching of external electrical consumers (e.g., relays).
All cables will be attached to the stress relieving bracket as shown in Figure 69.
Information about the wiring arrangement of the terminals is given in Table 11, Table 12,
Table 13.
g NOTE
For connection of external alarm sensors use cables with braided shield only and
the maximum wire diameter must not exceed 0,5 mm.
Remove the outer insulation for proper ground contact of the shield to the stress
relieving bracket.
The ACTM is mounted at the EMI panel of the shelter. For connection of alarm lines, the
ACTM must be unscrewed from EMI panel for access to the terminal blocks.
7 PCM 7 - DLA PCM Line 7 Down Link A
20 PCM 7 - DLB PCM Line 7 Down Link B
8 GND/G shield pair 6
9 PCM 8 - ULA PCM Line 8 Up Link A
21 PCM 8 - ULB PCM Line 8 Up Link B
11 GND/G shield pair 7
10 PCM 8 - DLA PCM Line 8 Down Link A
22 PCM 8 - DLB PCM Line 8 Down Link B
23 GND/G shield pair 8
12 ---
24 ---
25 GND/G
13 GND/G main cable shield
Pin no. SubD 25 Signal name Function
Table 10 Wiring of the PCM1 interface without OVPT (SubD 25 connector) (Cont.)
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

77
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B External cabling activities
Id:0900d805805aefac
Figure 67 Location of the ACTM
Before starting the connection works:
1. Remove the protection cover above the EMI-panel.
2. Loosen the 8 screws as shown in Figure 67.
3. Disconnect the internal cables from the ACTM.
4. Take out the ACTM and place the module into the slots of the EMI-panel (see Figure
68).
5. Fix the alarm cable at the stress relieving bracket as shown in the figure below.
Make sure that the cable screen has a proper ground contact to the bracket.
6. Attach the alarm wires to the matching spring terminals. The pinning of the terminal
blocks is provided in the following tables.
unscrew
unscrew
78 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805805aefac
External cabling activities
Figure 68 ACTM in connection position
Figure 69 Terminal numbering of ACTM
Pin
no.
Signal name
x4
Signal name
x3
Signal name
x2
Signal name
x1
1 AL24P AL30P AL36P AL42P
2 AL24M (GND) AL30M (GND) AL36M (GND) AL42M (GND)
3 AL25P AL31P AL37P AL43P
4 AL25M (GND) AL31M (GND) AL37M (GND) AL43M (GND)
5 AL26P AL32P AL38P AL44P
6 AL26M (GND) AL32M (GND) AL38M (GND) AL44M (GND)
Table 11 Wiring ACTM connectors X1 - X4
X5
X6
X7 X8
X1
X2 X3 X4
X9
X10
1 12 12 1
12 1
12 1
8
1 12 1 12
1 12
1
12
1
8
1
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

79
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B External cabling activities
Id:0900d805805aefac
The ACTM provides at the connectors X9 and X10 the possibility to switch 10 electrical
consumers at maximum (e.g.; relays with default contact open).
g NOTE
The switched current must not exceed 100 mA AC/DC (contact closed) and the
maximum switched voltage is limited to 150 VAC or 125 VDC (contact open). The
maximum switched power is 10 W.
7 AL27P AL33P AL39P AL45P
8 AL27M (GND) AL33M (GND) AL39M (GND) AL45M (GND)
9 AL28P AL34P AL40P AL46P
10 AL28M (GND) AL34M (GND) AL40M (GND) AL46M (GND)
11 AL29P AL35P AL41P AL47P
12 AL29M (GND) AL35M (GND) AL41M (GND) AL47M (GND)
Pin no. Signal name
x5
Signal name
x6
Signal name
x7
Signal name
x8
1 AL0P AL6P AL12P AL18P
2 AL0M (GND) AL6M (GND) AL12M (GND) AL18M (GND)
3 AL1P AL7P AL13P AL19P
4 AL1M (GND) AL7M (GND) AL13M (GND) AL19M (GND)
5 AL2P AL8P AL14P AL20P
6 AL2M (GND) AL8M (GND) AL14M (GND) AL20M (GND)
7 AL3P AL9P AL15P AL21P
8 AL3M (GND) AL9M (GND) AL15M (GND) AL21M (GND)
9 AL4P AL10P AL16P AL22P
10 AL4M (GND) AL10M (GND) AL16M (GND) AL22M (GND)
11 AL5P AL11P AL17P AL23P
12 AL5M (GND) AL11M (GND) AL17M (GND) AL23M (GND)
Table 12 Wiring ACTM connectors X5 - X8
Pin no. X9 Signal name Pin no. X10 Signal name
1 CMD4_P 1 CMD0_P
2 CMD4_M 2 CMD0_M
3 CMD5_P 3 CMD1_P
Table 13 Wiring ACTM connector X9, X10
Pin
no.
Signal name
x4
Signal name
x3
Signal name
x2
Signal name
x1
Table 11 Wiring ACTM connectors X1 - X4 (Cont.)
80 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805805aefac
External cabling activities
After all external alarm sensors are connected at the ACTM, mount the board in its
original position.
3.8.2 Connection of external alarm sensors at ACTM24
The access for cabling from external alarm sensors on site is the Alarm Collection
Terminal for Base rack ACTM24.
The ACTM24 provides 4 spring terminal blocks with 12 pins each for connecting of 24
external alarm sensors. Each terminal block allows the connection of wires with a cross-
section in the range between 0,08 mm
2
and 0,5 mm
2
(#28 - #20 AWG).
The spring terminals are labelled X1 ... X4. All cables will be fixed to the copper bracket
of the module for strain relief and grounding of the cable screen with cable ties.
Figure 70 Terminal numbering of the ACTM24
The following table gives information on the pin aasignment of the terminals.
g NOTE
For connection of external alarm sensors use cables with braided shield only.
Remove the outer insulation for proper ground contact of the cable screen to the
stress relieving bracket.
4 CMD5_M 4 CMD1_M
5 CMD6_P 5 CMD2_P
6 CMD6_M 6 CMD2_M
7 CMD7_P 7 CMD3_P
8 CMD7_M 8 CMD3_M
Pin no. X9 Signal name Pin no. X10 Signal name
Table 13 Wiring ACTM connector X9, X10 (Cont.)
X 1
X 3 X 4
12 12
12 12
stress releaving bracket
X2
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

81
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B External cabling activities
Id:0900d805805aefac
g NOTE
It is not allowed to connect a voltage source to the alarm inputs. The alarm source
has to be a open/close contact like a relais contact or switch.
The connection of alarm sensors located outside the building requires the installa-
tion of the MK:OPEXAL, that protects the ACTM24 against over-voltage.
g NOTE
The switched current must not exceed 100 mAAC/DC (contact closed) and the
maximum switched voltage is limited to 150 VAC or 125 VDC (contact open).
The maximum switching power is 10 W.
3.9 Installation of the MK:OPEXAL8V1
Due to the fact that external alarm sensors are located outside the shelter, the
MK:OPEXAL (Overvoltage Protection for external Alarms) is required. The MK:OPEXAL
protects up to 10 alarm lines which are connected to the ACTM against over-voltage.
Pin no. Signal name
X1
Signal name
X2
Signal name
X3
Signal name
X4
2, 4, 6, 8,10, 12 GND GND GND GND
1 AL18P AL12P AL6P AL0P
3 AL19P AL13P AL7P AL1P
5 AL20P AL14P AL8P AL2P
7 AL21P AL15P AL9P AL3P
9 AL22P AL16P AL10P AL4P
11 AL23P AL17P AL11P AL5P
Table 14 Pin assignments ACTM24 connectors X1...X4
82 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805805aefac
External cabling activities
Figure 71 Contents of the MK:OPEXAL8V1
g NOTE
The cable screens of the OUT-cables (coming from the MK:OPEXAL) must have
proper ground contact to the stress relieving bracket of the ACTM.
Do not lay the IN-cables from the alarm sensors and OUT-cables to the ACTM
parallel inside the shelters plinth.
Install the MK:OPEXAL in accordance with the following figure.
1. Open the front cover of the plinth and disconnect the ground wire.
2. Place contact washers on both bolts of the plinth cover
3. Setup the MK:OPEXAL on the front cover, so that both bolts are fitted through the
fixing holes of the mounting bar.
4. Fix the MK:OPEXAL with nuts and washers.
5. Connect a M8 bolt of the PE-plate and the ground terminal of the MK:OPEXAL with
the ground wire (see Figure 72). A cable lug M8 is needed.
screw, dowel and washers 6 mm
ground wire
10 symmetric pair
OPEXAL
cables
cable ties
ground terminal
(for indoor applications only)
for indoor applications only
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

83
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B External cabling activities
Id:0900d805805aefac
Figure 72 OPEXAL8V1 in mounted position
1. Fix the IN- and OUT cables at the mounting bar with cable ties.
2. Connect the wires of the IN- and OUT cables at the overvoltage protectors.
3. Route the OUT-cables inside the plinth to the ACTM.
4. Connect the cables at the matching spring terminals of the ACTM and fix the cables
at the stress relieving bracket of the ACTM.
g NOTE
If necessary, the kit can be extended with mounting kits MK:OPEXALUP. Each kit
consists of an overvoltage protector, the twisted pair connection cable and a cable
tie. The MK:OPEXAL8V1 can be extended with 11 overvoltage protectors in
maximum (see figure below).
Figure 73 Extension of the MK:OPEXAL8V1
3.10 Installation of the MK:OPEXAL10V1
Due to the fact that external alarm sensors are located outside the shelter, the
MK:OPEXAL (Overvoltage Protection for external Alarms) is required. The MK:OPEXAL
protects up to 10 alarm lines, that are connected to the ACTM, against over-voltage.
ground wire to PE-plate
from external alarm sensors
to ACTM
fixing with contact washer, washer and nut
standard modules of
MK:OPEXAL8V1
6x MK:OPEXALUP 5x MK:OPEXALUP
end holder
ground clamp
mounting bar
84 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805805aefac
External cabling activities
Figure 74 Assembly Guideline
The fixing of the mounting bar MK:OPEXALBV1at the plinth cover is as described in
section 3.9.
To connect the internal and external cables perform the following steps:
1. Attach the inter-connection cable (delivered with the OPEXAL10V1) to the Sub D 25
female connector of the OPEXAL10V1.
2. Route the cable to the ACTM module in the EMI-panel of the base shelter.
3. Secure the cable two times at the stress relieving facilities of the mounting bar.
4. Fix the inter-connection cable at the stress relieving bracket of the ACTM with cables
ties, so that the ground contact between cable screen and the bracket is provided.
5. Remove the plugs of the connection blocks X3 and X4 to connect the OPEXAL10V1
module no. 0 and X1, X2 to connect the (optional) module 1.
6. Setup the plugs with the connected wires at the matching blocks.
The following figure shows the connection of the cables at the ACTM module.
Figure 75 ACTM, connection of the cables from OPEXAL10V1
mounting bar
ground terminal
ground wire to PE-plate
OPEXAL10V1
to ACTM
from external alarm sensors
SubD 25
optional
module0 module1
(MK:OPEXALBV1)
cables from
S30864-X210-A105
S30864-X210-A105
OPEXAL10V1
from module 1
from module 0
X1
X2 X3 X4
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

85
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B External cabling activities
Id:0900d805805aefac
Quad Binder Tape Color Wire Color Plug X4 Pin Plug X3 Pin
1 blue white/blue 1
white/orange 2
blue 3
orange 4
2 orange white/blue 5
white/orange 6
blue 7
orange 8
3 green white/blue 9
white/orange 10
blue 11
orange 12
4 brown white/blue 1
white/orange 2
blue 3
orange 4
5 grey white/blue 5
white/orange 6
blue 7
orange 8
6 black white/blue not used
white/orange not used
blue not used
orange not used
red white/blue not used
white/orange not used
blue not used
orange not used
Table 15 OPEXAL10V1 module 0 connection at ACTM
86 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805805aefac
External cabling activities
The ground pin of the OPEXAL10V1 has to be connected with the ground terminal,
mounted on the mounting bar MK:OPEXALBV1 (see Figure 76).
The pre-fabricated wire will be delivered with the OPEXAL10V1.
Quad Binder Tape Color Wire Color Plug X2 Pin Plug X1 Pin
1 blue white/blue 1
white/orange 2
blue 3
orange 4
2 orange white/blue 5
white/orange 6
blue 7
orange 8
3 green white/blue 9
white/orange 10
blue 11
orange 12
4 brown white/blue 1
white/orange 2
blue 3
orange 4
5 grey white/blue 5
white/orange 6
blue 7
orange 8
6 black white/blue not used
white/orange not used
blue not used
orange not used
red white/blue not used
white/orange not used
blue not used
orange not used
Table 16 OPEXAL10V1 module 1 connection at ACTM
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

87
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B External cabling activities
Id:0900d805805aefac
Figure 76 Connector assignment of the OPEXAL10V1
The external alarm sensors will be connected with screened twisted-pair cables at the
clamping block of the OPEXAL10V1. The clamping block allows the connection of wires
with a cross section in the range 0,08 - 0,5 mm2. The lable of the module gives informa-
tion about the terminal assignment of the clamping block.
In addition, the terminal assignment is displayed in the following figure.
Figure 77 Label with terminal assignment
g NOTE
Do not lay the IN-and OUT cables in parallel inside the shelters plinth.
3.11 Alarm collection terminal ACTC - internal alarms / DC
supply
The ACTC is the connection board to support single connectors for the internal alarms
(FAN, heat exchanger, temperature sensor, rack in service...) and the DC supply for the
FANs, HXheat exchangers, microwave equipment and smoke sensor.
The ACTC is located in the DC panel (see figure below).
ground pi n
clamping block for connection
of external alarm sensor s
AL29
AL41
A
L
_
P
G
N
D
A
L
_
M
A
L
_
P
G
N
D
A
L
_
M
A
L
_
P
G
N
D
A
L
_
M
A
L
_
P
G
N
D
A
L
_
M
A
L
_
P
G
N
D
A
L
_
M
A
L
_
P
G
N
D
A
L
_
M
A
L
_
P
G
N
D
A
L
_
M
A
L
_
P
G
N
D
A
L
_
M
A
L
_
P
G
N
D
A
L
_
M
A
L
_
P
G
N
D
A
L
_
M
AL30
AL42
AL31
AL43
AL32
AL44
AL33
AL45
AL36
AL24
AL37
AL25
AL38
AL26
AL39
AL27
AL40
AL28
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
valid alarm no. for module 0
valid alarm no. for module 1
88 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805805aefac
External cabling activities
Figure 78 Connector arrangement at ACTC (BS-241)
g NOTE
It is recommended to use an opto-coupler for open collector alarm to be connected
to the ACTC. This is to avoid detection failures due to galvanic coupling of noise from
external to internal signal ground.
Maximum "Alarm Low"-voltage: UceAL-AL_GND < 400mV at Ic = 2mA
Minimum "Alarm High"-resistance: RceAL-AL_GND > 500 kOhm
If a switching contact (relay) is used as an alarm source I/F, the maximum "Alarm
Low"-resistance RAL-AL_GND shall be less than 200 Ohm.
The following table gives information about the connecting of internal alarm sensors at
the ACTC.
24
1
X36 X35 X34
X19 X18 X17
X30 X29 X28
X33 X32 X31 X37
X38 X39 X40
X1 X2
X26
AL Connector / Pin on ACTC Base / Extension Service1 / Service2
Shelter 0, 1, 2 Shelter 3, ..., Shelter 7
0 Front side X1 RDO (High Active) RDO (High Active)
1 Rear side X20 FAN0 (High Active) FAN0 (High Active)
2 Rear side X21 FAN1 (High Active) FAN1 (High Active)
3 Rear side X22 FAN2 (High Active) FAN2 (High Active)
4 Rear side X23 FAN3 (High Active) FAN3 (High Active)
5 Rear side X24 FAN4 (High Active) FAN4 (if installed) (High Active)
6 Rear side X25 FAN5 (High Active) FAN5 (if installed) (High Active)
7 2) Front side X17, X26 / 11,12 Enva0 (High / low Active) Enva0 (High / low Active)
8 2) Front side X18, X26 / 9,10 Enva1 (High / low Active) Enva1 (High / low Active)
9 Front side X19, X26 / 7, 8 Enva2 (High / low Active) Enva2 (High / low Active)
10 Front side X2 Enva3 (SIS) (High Active) Enva3 (SIS) (High Active)
11 3) Front side X37, X26 / 5, 6 Enva4 (SMOKE)
1)
(Low Active) Enva4 (SMOKE)
1)
(Low Active)
Table 17 ACTC alarms for BS-241 shelter
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

89
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B External cabling activities
Id:0900d805805aefac
3.12 Alarm collection terminal ACTC-3 - internal alarms / DC
supply
The ACTC-3 collects all internal alarms of the BS-241 II shelters and is located at the
DC panel of the Base- and Extension Shelters, AD-panel of each Service1A Shelter and
at the LE-panel of Service2 Shelters.
Figure 79 Connector arrangement at the ACTC-3
An optional smoke sensor for all shelter types can be mounted below the top panel. It
operates on the principle of a light scatter. The sensor opens / closes a relay contact
(type-dependent, see table below) due to voltage loss or if the sensor is triggered and
connected to the ACTC. The shelters can be equipped with two different types of smoke
sensors.
The following tables provides information about the connection of internal alarm sensors
at the ACTC-3 for BS-241 II.
12 4) Front side X38, X39, X40 Enva5 (High / low Active) Enva5 (High / low Active)
13 Rear side X41 Enva6 (OVP) 1)(High Active) Enva6 (OVP) 1) (High Active)
14 Front side X26 / 3, 4 Enva7 (High / low Active) Enva7 (High / low Active)
15 Front side X28...36, X26 / 1, 2
(all connected in parallel)
Enva8 (High / low Active) Enva8 (High / low Active)
Notes: 1) High Active if OVP is installed, 2) alarm connection on clamping block X26 in parallel with dedi-
cated connector at the ACTC rear side, 3) alarm connection on clamping block X26 in parallel with dedicated
connector at the ACTC front side, 4) connectors X38, X39 and X40 connected in series inside ACTC and wired
to alarm ENVA5, General: ENVAX is LMT relevant syntax
AL Connector / Pin on ACTC Base / Extension Service1 / Service2
Table 17 ACTC alarms for BS-241 shelter (Cont.)
Sensor Type Order No. Contact Description Alarm Configuration
MK:SMOKEV4 S30861-K2254-X normally closed 1) High Active
MK:SMOKEV3 S30861-K4113-X normally open 2) Low Active
1) this is the default type, 2) relevant, if explicitely required by the customer (project
specific)
Table 18 Contact data of the smoke sensors
1
24
X37 X48
X45
X20
90 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805805aefac
External cabling activities
The spring terminal block of the ACTC allows the connection of wires in a diameter
range of 0.08 mm2... 0.5 mm2
g NOTE
It is recommended to use an opto-coupler for open collector alarm I/F to be con-
nected to the ACTC-3. This is to avoid detection failures due to galvanic coupling of
noise from external to internal signal ground.
Maximum "Alarm Low"-voltage: UceAL-AL_GND < 400mV at Ic = 2mA
Minimum "Alarm High"-resistance: RceAL-AL_GND > 500 kOhm
If a switching contact (relay) is used as an alarm source I/F, the maximum "Alarm
Low"-resistance RAL-AL_GND shall be less than 200 Ohm.
AL Connector / Pin on ACTC Base / Extension Service1A / Service2
Shelter 0, 1, 2 Shelter 3, ..., Shelter 7
0 Front side X48 RDO (High Active) RDO (High Active)
1 Rear side X47 FAN0 (High Active) FAN0 (High Active)
2 Rear side X21 FAN1 (High Active) FAN1 (High Active)
3 Rear side X22 FAN2 (High Active) FAN2 (High Active)
4
3)
Rear side X23, Front side X45 / 23, 24 FAN3 (High Active) FAN3 (High Active) (if not installed
ENVA9)
5
3)
Rear side X24, Front side X45 / 21, 22 FAN4 (High Active) FAN4 (High Active) (if not installed
ENVA10)
6
3)
Rear side X25, Front side X45 / 19, 20 FAN5 (High Active) FAN5 (High Active) (if not installed
ENVA11)
7
3)
Rear side X43, Front side X45 / 17, 18 Enva0
(High / low Active)
Enva0
(High / low Active)
8
3)
Front side X45 / 15 ,16 Enva1
(High / low Active)
Enva1
(High / low Active)
9 Front side X45 / 13, 14 Enva2
(High / low Active)
Enva2
(High / low Active)
(MBR)
10 Front side X45 / 11, 12 Enva3
(High / low Active)
Enva3
(High / low Active)
(BBR)
11
4)
Front side X37, X45 / 9, 10 Enva4 (SMOKE)
1)
(High / low
Active)
Enva4 (SMOKE)
(High / low Active)
12 Front side X45 / 7, 8 Enva5 (High / low Active) Enva5 (High / low Active) (MAJ)
13
3)
Rear side X41, Front side X45 / 5, 6 Enva6 (OVP)
2)
(High Active) Enva6 (OVP)
1)
(High Active)
14 Front side X45 / 3, 4 Enva7 (High / low Active) Enva7 (High / low Active) (BCHF)
15 Front side X45 / 1, 2 Enva8 (High / low Active) Enva8 (High / low Active) (48OTB)
1) High Active if MK:SMOKEV4 is installed; Low Active if MK:SMOKEV3 is installed (see also Tab: Data of
the smoke sensors, 2) High Active if OVP is installed, 3) alarm connection on clamping block X45 in parallel
with dedicated connector at the ACTC rear side, 4) alarm connection on clamping block X45 in parallel with
dedicated connector at the ACTC front side, General: ENVAX is LMT relevant syntax
Table 19 ACTC alarms for BS-241 II shelters
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

91
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B External cabling activities
Id:0900d805805aefac
3.13 Alarm collection terminal ACTC-4 - internal alarms / DC
supply
The ACTC-4 collects all internal alarms of the BS-241 II shelters and is located at the
DC panel of the Base- and Extension Shelters, AD-panel of each Service1A Shelter and
at the LE-panel of Service2 Shelters.
Figure 80 Connector arrangement at the ACTC-4
An optional smoke sensor for all shelter types can be mounted below the top panel. It
operates on the principle of a light scatter. The sensor opens / closes a relay contact
(type-dependent, see table below) due to voltage loss or if the sensor is triggered and
connected to the ACTC. The shelters can be equipped with two different types of smoke
sensors.
The following table provides information about the connection of internal alarm sensors
at the ACTC-4 for BS-241 II.
Sensor Type Order No. Contact Description Alarm Configuration
MK:SMOKEV4 S30861-K2254-X normally closed 1) High Active
MK:SMOKEV3 S30861-K4113-X normally open 2) Low Active
1) this is the default type, 2) relevant, if explicitely required by the customer (project
specific)
Table 20 Contact data of the smoke sensors
LMU SMOKE
RDO 24 1
X1
X2 X3 X4
AL Connector / Pin on ACTC Base / Extension Service1A / Service2
Shelter 0, 1, 2 Shelter 3, ..., Shelter 7
0 Front side: X3/RDO (2pin AMP) RDO (High Active) RDO (High Active)
1 Top of PCB: X17 (4pin AMP) FAN0 (High Active) FAN0 (High Active)
2 Top of PCB: X13 (4pin AMP) FAN1 (High Active) FAN1 (High Active)
3 Top of PCB: X16 (4pin AMP) FAN2 (High Active) FAN2 (High Active)
4
2)
Top of PCB: X12 (4pin AMP)
Front side: X4/ 24, 23 (AL / GND)
FAN3 (High Active) FAN3 (High Active)
(if not installed: ENVA9)
5
2)
Top of PCB: X15 (4pin AMP)
Front side: X4 / 22, 21(AL / GND)
FAN4
(High Active)
FAN4
(High Active)
(if not installed ENVA10)
Table 21 ACTC-4 alarms for BS-241 II shelters
92 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805805aefac
External cabling activities
g NOTE
It is recommended to use an opto-coupler for open collector alarm I/F to be con-
nected to the ACTC-4. This is to avoid detection failures due to galvanic coupling of
noise from external to internal signal ground.
Maximum "Alarm Low"-voltage: UceAL-AL_GND < 400mV at Ic = 2mA
Minimum "Alarm High"-resistance: RceAL-AL_GND > 500 kOhm
If a switching contact (relay) is used as an alarm source I/F, the maximum "Alarm
Low"-resistance RAL-AL_GND shall be less than 200 Ohm.
6
2)
Top of PCB: X11 (4pin AMP)
Front side: X4 / 20, 19 (AL / GND)
FAN5 (High Active) FAN5 (High Active)
(if not installed ENVA11)
7
2)
Top of PCB: X14 (4pin AMP)
Front side: X4 / 18, 17 (AL / GND)
Enva0 (High / low Active) Enva0 (High / low Active)
8
2)
Top of PCB: X10 (4pin AMP)
Front side: X4 / 16 ,15 (AL / GND)
Enva1 (High / low Active) Enva1 (High / low Active)
9 4) Top of PCB: X26, pin1(AL,SubD to ACDC)
Front side: X4 / 14, 13 (AL / GND)
Enva2
(High / low Active)
Enva2 (High / low Active)
(MBR) 5) 8)
10 4) Top of PCB: X26, pin2(AL,SubD to ACDC)
Front side: X4 / 12, 11 (AL / GND)
Enva3 (High / low Active) Enva3 (High Active)
(BBR) 5)
11
3)
Front side: X2/SMOKE (4pin AMP)
Front side: X4 / 10, 9 (AL / GND)
Enva4 (High / low Active)
(SMOKE) 7)
Enva4 (High / low Active)
(SMOKE) 7)
12 4) Top of PCB: X26, pin6(AL,SubD to ACDC)
Front side: X4 / 8, 7 (AL / GND)6)
Enva5 (High / low Active) Enva5 (High / low Active) 6)
(MAJ) 5) 8)
13
2)
Top of PCB: X7/OVP (2pin AMP)
Front side: X4/ 6,5 (AL / GND)
Enva6 (OVP)
2)
(High Active) Enva6 (High Active)
(OVP) 1)
14 4) Top of PCB: X26, pin3 (AL,SubD to ACDC)
Front side X4 / 4, 3 (AL / GND)
Enva7 (High / low Active) Enva7 (High / low Active)
(BCHF) 5)
15 4) Top of PCB X26 pin4(AL,SubD to ACDC)
Front side X4 / 2, 1 (AL / GND)
Enva8
(High / low Active)
Enva8 (High / low Active)
(48OTB) 5)
1) High Active if OVP for MSU is configured 2) alarm connection on terminal block X4 in parallel with dedicated
connector
at the top of ACTC-PCB 3) alarm connection on terminal block X4 in parallel with dedicated connector
at the ACTC-front 4) alarm connection on terminal block X4 in parallel with dedicated SubD-pin of link to AC/DC
5) AC/DC alarms (all High Active) are only relevant for Service1A cabinet 6) ENVA5 (AL 12) is not available,
if MAJ alarm is activated (see jumper settings in Fig. 2.70. 7) High Active if MK:SMOKEV4 is installed,
Low Active if MK:SMOKEV3 is installed 8) to create the alarm, trigger the emergency configuration, its
associated string must be set to: ##ACDC_FAULT
General: EnvaX is LMT relevant syntax
AL Connector / Pin on ACTC Base / Extension Service1A / Service2
Table 21 ACTC-4 alarms for BS-241 II shelters (Cont.)
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

93
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B External cabling activities
Id:0900d805805aefac
Figure 81 Jumper settings on the top side of the PCB
3.14 Alarm collection terminal ACTCS - internal alarms / DC
supply
The ACTCS collects all internal alarms of the BS-241 II Service1B and is located at the
AD- panel of the shelters. These alarms will be guided via the SubD25 connector outside
the shelter to the ACTM board of the Base shelter.
Therefore the prefabricated twisted pair cable S30864-X210-A143 is needed. The cable
is equipped with a SubD25 male connector at the end that has to be connected at the
SubD25 connector of the ACTCS. The end, that will be guided to the ACTM board inside
the Base shelter, provides two 12pin plugs (X, Y), for setting-up onto the ACTMs con-
nection blocks.
An optional smoke sensor for all shelter types can be mounted below the top panel. It
operates on the principle of a light scatter. The sensor opens / closes a relay contact due
to voltage loss or if the sensor is triggered and connected to the ACTC. The shelters can
be equipped with two different types of smoke sensors.
In addition, the ACTCS provides a 10-pole spring terminal block for the DC-supply of up
to 5 link equipment units and the associated 5A fuses.
LMU
SMOKE
RDO terminal bl ock
1 24
SubD 25 socket
(link to AC/DC system)
X24
1
2
3
1
2
3
on
off
on
off
X24
X24
front side
rear side
default jumper position
(pins 2, 3 connected), MAJor alarm
is deactivated, Alarm 12 is available
on terminal block X4
changed jumper position
(pins 1,2 connected), MAJor alarm
is activated, occupying Alarm 12,
that is thus not available on
terminal block X4
Sensor Type Order No. Contact Description Alarm Configuration
MK:SMOKEV4 S30861-K2254-X normally closed 1) High Active
MK:SMOKEV3 S30861-K4113-X normally open 2) Low Active
1) this is the default type, 2) relevant, if explicitely required by the customer (project
specific)
Table 22 Contact data of the smoke sensors
94 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805805aefac
External cabling activities
The battery temperature sensor has to be plugged-in at the 2pin AMP connector X11.
Connector arrangement of the ACTCS is shown in the following figure.
Figure 82 Connector arrangement of the ACTCS
Connector SubD25 to ACTM Alarm
X4 (2pin AMP) 1, 14 (AL / GND) RDO (High Active)
X13 (4pin AMP) 3, 16 (AL / GND) SMOKE
1)
X5 (2pin AMP) 4, 17 (AL / GND) BATT_breaker (High Active)
X6 (2pin AMP) 5, 18 (AL / GND) OVP
2a)
(High Active)
X7 (2pin AMP) 6, 19 (AL / GND) BLOCK
2b)
(High Active)
--- 7, 20 (AL / GND) MBR (High Active)
--- 8, 21 (AL / GND) BBR (High Active)
--- 9, 22 (AL / GND) BCHF (High Active)
--- 10, 23 (AL / GND) 48OTB (High Active)
--- 11, 24 (AL / GND) CSU (High Active)
--- 12, 25 (AL / GND) EMA (High Active)
1) High Active if MK:SMOKEV4 is installed, Low Active if MK:SMOKEV3 is installed
2a) Overvoltage Protection of MSU 2b) blocking of MEF
Table 23 ACTCS alarms for BS-241 II Service1B shelter
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
5A fuses
for link equipment
X4 X5 X6 X7 X11
X13
F8
1
10
LE0
LE4
terminal block for
link equipment DC supply
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

95
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B External cabling activities
Id:0900d805805aefac
3.15 Local maintenance terminal (LMT) interface
A SubD 15 female connector or the RJ45 socket, located at the DC panel of the Base
Shelter, is the interface for the connection of a Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) for
commissioning and maintenance purposes.
Figure 83 Location of the LMT interface
spring terminal no. DC supply for: associated LE fuse
1 LE0 (PUE) F1
2 LE0 (MUE)
3 LE1 (PUE) F2
4 LE1 (MUE)
5 LE2 (PUE) F3
6 LE2 (MUE)
7 LE3 (PUE) F4
8 LE3 (MUE)
9 LE4 (PUE) F5
10 LE4 (MUE)
Table 24 DC supply and fuses for link equipment of ACTCS
SUB-D15 Pin No. Signal Name SUB-D15 Pin No. Signal name
1 --- 2 LMT_TA
3 LMT_CA 4 LMT_RA
5 LMT_IA 6 LMT_SA
7 --- 8 GND
Table 25 Wiring of the LMT interface
BS-241 BS-241 II
96 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805805aefac
External cabling activities
3.16 Antenna connections
The BTSE has to be connected to the transmit and receive antennas. The antenna con-
figuration and the required cabling are dependent on the site and the type of combining.
For detailed information refer to the site-specific documentation or use the correspond-
ing customer documents.
For installation and service purposes it is useful to know, which hardware is connected
to which cell. The numbering, seen from the top of the antenna pole, starts at an azimuth
angle of 0 (north) and rotates clockwise.
The first existing cell whose beam centre line lies at 0 or more, is defined as cell 0 or
sector 0. The next one following in the same direction cell is cell 1 etc.
In case of an omni cell, the cell no. is 0.
9 LMT_TB 10 LMT_CB
11 LMT_RB 12 LMT_IB
13 LMT_SB 14 ---
RJ45 Pin No. Signal Name RJ45 Pin No. Signal name
1 10BT_TD+ 2 10BT_TD-
3 10BT_RD+ 4 ---
5 --- 6 10BT_RD-
7 --- 8 ---
Table 26 Wiring of the LMT RJ45 interface
SUB-D15 Pin No. Signal Name SUB-D15 Pin No. Signal name
Table 25 Wiring of the LMT interface (Cont.)
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

97
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B External cabling activities
Id:0900d805805aefac
Figure 84 Cell numbering (top view from the antenna pole)
3.16.1 Preparation of antenna jumper cables
Short jumper cables with a max. diameter 1/2 have to be used for connections between
the antenna feeder cables and the front connectors of the combining modules, because
the thick cables from the antenna are not able to enter the shelters.
With regard to lightning surge protection, it is required to connect the shields of the
antenna feeder cables with the site groundwhere they are connected with the jumper
cables outside the shelters.
If no pre-fabricated cables should be used, the jumper cables have to be fabricated of
1/2 highly flexible coaxial cable on-site.
Fabricate the jumper cables in steps as shown in the following figures.
sector width 120
sector angle
directional antenna
pole
sector 0
sector 1
sector 2
N
0
beam centre line
98 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805805aefac
External cabling activities
Figure 85 Tools for jumper fabrication
Figure 86 Parts of the connector unit kit (example)
1. Measure the distance between the end of the antenna feeder cable and the front
connectors of the combining modules.
2. Saw the cable to the required length. Do not deform cable outer conductor, when
using too much pressure for sawing!
connector head
corrugation nut
fitting ring
emery paper
cleaning tissue
heat protection tape
heat shrink sleeve
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

99
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B External cabling activities
Id:0900d805805aefac
Figure 87 Using the trimming tool
Figure 88 Removal of isolation and deburring of inner conductor
Figure 89 Removal of metal particles
1
2
rotate clockwis e
heat shrink sleeve
fitting ring
100 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805805aefac
External cabling activities
Figure 90 Assembly of the connector unit
Figure 91 Fixing of connector unit, removal of outer insulation
Figure 92 Handling of heat protection tape and shrink sleeve
corrugation nut
fitting ring
connector head
20 mm
heat protection tape
heat shrink sleeve
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

101
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B External cabling activities
Id:0900d805805aefac
Figure 93 Shrinkage and removal of the visible heat protection tape
The jumper cables must be routed through the EMI / IP panel forward to the 7/16 front
connectors of the DUAMCO / FICOM module and to the N-type front connector of the
DIAMCO.
g NOTE
The depth of the right angle connector must not exceed 45 mm.
Figure 94 Max. dimensions of antenna connectors
Connect the jumper cables to the combining equipment as follows:
1. Loosen the removable parts of the cable feeding module and take them out.
2. Remove the 15 mm of the outer insulation of the jumper cables in the area where
they pass the EMI panel. Make sure that a proper ground contact between the outer
conductor and the lids of the cable feeding module is provided.
3. Route the antenna jumpers to the shelter, that has to be connected.
4. Feed the jumpers through the cable feeding module forward to the front connectors
of the antenna combiners. Fix the jumpers cables at the connectors TX/RX of com-
biners to a torque of 25 Nm.
5. Fix the cables at the stress relieving bracket with cable ties. Make sure that the
closing of the cable feeding module is possible without pressure.
6. Insert the removed parts of the cable feeding module and screw them in their original
position.
remove extra length
of heat protection tape
hot air stream
max. 1.8/45 mm
max. 1/2 jumper cable
width across flats 32
102 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805805aefac
External cabling activities
Figure 95 Opening of the cable feeding module
Figure 96 Antenna jumpers at the cable feeding module
3.17 Installation of tower mounted amplifiers (TMA)
A Tower Mounted Amplifier could be used to compensate a high antenna cable loss in
uplink direction, i.e. the effective BTS receiver sensitivity will be improved.
unscrew
remove the outer insulation
!
WARNING
If the antenna cable is disconnected during operation, hazardous high electric field
strength may be present at the open antenna connector.
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

103
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B External cabling activities
Id:0900d805805aefac
The TMA should placed as close to the antenna as possible. It will be powered and
supervised by the multi coupling equipment (DIAMCO or DUAMCO) in the rack it is con-
nected to.
When using a DUAMCO as antenna combiner, only one feeder cable per antenna is
needed between the TMA and the BTS (for both TX and RX signals) due to full duplex
architecture of the TMA.
Figure 97 Position of TMA (DUAMCO combiner used)
If a FICOM as antenna combiner is installed, the TMA is used in conjunction with a
DIAMCO and it only amplifies the BTS uplink signal.
Figure 98 Position of TMA (FICOM combiner used)
If a TMA used in conjunction with the HPDU, a DUBIAS is needed for powering and sig-
nalling of the TMA. The configuration is shown in the following figure. Install the TMA as
displayed in Figure 99.
Base Rack
DUAMCO CU
TMA TMA
TMA TMA
Base Rack
DIAMCO CU
FICOM
104 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805805aefac
External cabling activities
Figure 99 Configuration with HPDU, DUBIAS and TMA
Figure 100 Installation of TMA and DUBIAS
3.17.1 Installation of the TMADV1
Two 7/16 female connectors, located at the bottom of the TMADV1 (ANT and BTS) are
the interfaces for connection of the 1/2 antenna jumper cables that connect the
TMADV1 with the antenna and the antenna feeder cable towards to the BTS.
The TMA can be pole-or wall mounted in vertical position only.
The location of the external interfaces is shown in Figure 101.
The mounting of the TMA may be done as follows in accordance with Figure 102.
1. While still on ground, join each of the 2 brackets with one screw M8, but leave the
brackets open. Be sure not to loose the remaining 2 screws.
2. Position the TMA on the mast/pole and tighten the remaining 2 screws.
3. Connect the TMADV1 with the jumper cables to the feeder cable and the antenna.
4. Do not forget to consider thermal dimensional changes of the antenna feeder cable.
5. Attach the ground wire to the ground screw of the TMADV1 and connect the wire at
nearest grounding facility at the mast or pole.
6. The ground wires eyes must have the right size for the TMAs M8 ground bolt and
the cable should have a cross section not less than 16 mm2.
TMA TMA
DIAMCO
FICOM
HPDU
DUBIAS
RX1
RX2
RX8
CU1
CU2
CU8
FICOM From
RXIN
BIAS
PATH
TMA to
DIAMCO
ANT1
ANT0
HPDU2
DIAMCO
RXOUT
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

105
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B External cabling activities
Id:0900d805805aefac
Figure 101 Bottom view of the TMADV1 (Single TMA)
g NOTE
Note, that the max. diameter of the pole do not exceed 140 mm, if the fixing material
should be used as shown in the following figure.
Figure 102 TMA with mounting brackets
The TMADV1 can be also mounted at a wall with suitable dowels and screws (not
supplied with the TMADV1)
The corresponding holes in the TMAs mounting plate have a diameter of 9 mm.
The proper way to mount the TMA at a wall varies from case to case.
The best method can only be decided by the installer. Please note, however, that the
wall itself does probably not provide adequate grounding, it may be insulated.
AN T
(input/output
towards TX/RX antenna)
(input/output
towards BTS)
BT S
grounding point
!
CAUTION
It is absolute necessary to prepare and connect an adequate grounding cable to the
TMAs grounding point.
Pay attention to the thermals dimensional changes of the antenna feeder cable.
106 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805805aefac
External cabling activities
3.17.2 Installation of the STMAx / DTMAx
The Single Tower Mounted Amplifiers (STMAx) and the Dual Tower Mounted Amplifiers
(DTMAx) are RF units that feed the downlink signal to one TX/RX antenna and amplify,
with low noise figure, the uplink signal from the same TX/RX antenna.
The DTMAx / STMAx should be placed as close to the antenna as possible. They will
be supplied and supervised by the multi coupling equipment in the rack it is connected
to.
Figure 103 Example of STMAx and DTMAx
Figure 104 Rear side of STMAx and DTMAx (example)
g NOTE
It is recommended to mount the DTMAx and the STMAx at pole or wall in a vertical
position, so that the ground screw of the units is pointing downwards.
In certain cases is the mounting in a horizontal position (e.g., on cable runways) pos-
sible, it depends on the environmental conditions.
The DTMAx and the STMAx provides 7/16 female connectors for the connection with
the BTSE (COM) and the antenna (ANT).
Each DTMAx / STMAx has to be connected directly to the site ground system. The
grounding wires must be prepared for on site.
The unit provides a ground screw with a locking washer attached to it and a threaded
hole for connection of the grounding wire. The grounding wires cable lug must have the
Single Tower Mounted Amplifie r Dual Tower Mounted Amplifie r
Dual Tower Mounted Amplifie r Single Tower Mounted Amplifie r
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

107
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B External cabling activities
Id:0900d805805aefac
right size for the M8 ground screw. The cross section of the ground wire must be not less
than 16 mm2.
The other end of the grounding wire should be safely connected to a well grounded point
on the pole.
Hose clips surrounds the pole, that are fitted through the corresponding openings of the
mounting plate (see rear view of the devices). This is the situation just before tightening
the hose clips.
Figure 105 Example of pole mounting with the STMAx
For the mounting, the following steps can generally be recommended:
1. Place the unit in its final mounting position at the pole.
2. Secure the unit with a tensioning belt.
3. Close the hose clip loosely around the pole.
4. Tighten the hose clip screws carefully, but do not over-tighten (see Figure 105).
5. Remove the tensioning belt.
6. Connect the DTMAx / STMAx via a 1/2 jumper cable to the antenna feeder cable
(connector COM) and to the antenna jumper cable (connector ANT). The torque
must be 25 Nm.
7. Connect the grounding wire with the ground screw of the unit. Tighten the connec-
tion to a torque of 5 Nm.
8. The use of self-vulcanizing tape as a weather protection of the connectors is recom-
mended.
The DTMAx / STMAx may be mounted on a wall by means of suitable screws and
dowels (not supplied with the device).
The corresponding holes in the mounting plate have a diameter of 9 mm. The proper
way to mount the device on a wall varies from case to case. The best method can only
be decided by the installer. Please note, however, that the wall itself probably does not
provide adequate grounding, it may be insulated.
hose clips
tighten
tighten
108 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805805aefac
External cabling activities
g NOTE
It is absolutely necessary to prepare and connect an adequate grounding wire to the
STMAx / DTMAx nearest grounding point.
The cross section of the ground wires should be not less than 16 mm2.
Pay attention to the thermal dimensional changes of the antenna feeder cables.
3.17.3 Installation of the MHA
The mast head amplifier MHA should be placed as close to the antenna as possible. It
will be supplied and supervised by the multicoupling equipment in the rack it is con-
nected to.
Various versions for different frequency bands of the MHA are available.
g NOTE
It is recommended to mount the MHA at pole or wall in a vertical position, so that the
ground screw of the units is pointing downwards.
In certain cases is the mounting in a horizontal position (e.g., on cable runways) pos-
sible, it depends on the environmental conditions.
The MHA is designed for pole mounting with hose band clips or wall mounting with
screws and dowels.
The unit provides 7/16 female connectors for the connection with the BTSE (lettered
BTS1 / BTS2) and the antenna (lettered ANT1 / ANT2).
The unit provides a ground screw with a locking washer attached to it and a threaded
hole for connection of the grounding wire. The grounding wire cable lug must have the
right size for the M8 ground screw. The cross section of the ground wire must be not less
than 16 mm
2
.
In case of pole mounting, it is recommended to perform the following:
Hose clips surrounds the pole and are fitted into the corresponding openings of the
mounting plate.
BTS type MHA type frequency band
BS-24x / BS-4x with MFDUAMCO or
FICOM6
MDTA 850 MHz
MDGA E-GSM / 900 MHz
MDDA 1800 MHz
MDPA 1900 MHz
Table 27 Types of the MHA
MHA type frequency band outer dimension in mm (HxWxD)
MDTA 850 MHz 350 x 210 x 100
MDGA E-GSM / 900 MHz
MDDA 1800 MHz 295 x 210 x 65
MDPA 1900 MHz
Table 28 Types of the MHA
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

109
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B External cabling activities
Id:0900d805805aefac
1. Place the unit in its final mounting position at the pole.
2. Secure the unit with a tensioning belt.
3. Close the hose clip loosely around the pole.
4. Tighten the hose clip screws carefully, but do not over-tighten.
5. Remove the tensioning belt.
6. Connect the MHA with 1/2 jumper cables to the antenna feeders (connectors BTS1
and BTS2) and with 1/2 jumper cables to the antenna (connectors ANT1 and
ANT2). The torque must be 25 - 30 Nm.
7. Connect the grounding wire with the ground screw of the unit. Tighten the connec-
tion to a torque of 5 Nm.
8. The use of self-vulcanizing tape as an environmental protection of the connectors is
recommended.
Figure 106 Example of pole mounting with the STMAx
The may be mounted on a wall by means of suitable screws and dowels (not supplied
with the device). In this case proceed as follows:
1. Place the unit in its final mounting position at wall and mark the 4 drilling points.
2. Drill the holes with a twisted widia drill (d=8 mm) to a depth of 50 mm.
3. Insert the dowels and fix the MHA with 4 screws M8.
4. Connect the MHA with 1/2 jumper cables to the antenna feeders (connectors BTS1
and BTS2) and with 1/2 jumper cables to the antenna (connectors ANT1 and
ANT2). The torque must be 25 - 30 Nm.
5. Connect the grounding wire with the ground screw of the unit. Tighten the connec-
tion to a torque of 5 Nm.
hose clips
tighten
tighten
110 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805805aefac
External cabling activities
6. The use of self-vulcanizing tape as an environmental protection of the connectors is
recommended.
!
WARNING!
Pay attention to the regulations for working in dangerous heights. Do not work without
fall protection equipment.
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

111
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter completion
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
4 Shelter completion
The shelters are shipped including equipment components, pre-installed by the manu-
facturer in accordance with the customers configuration.
The following items are provided for installation after setup of the shelter on site:
Backup batteries
Link equipment
Cable sets for connections between the shelters
Extension of the BS-241 with BS-241 II or BS-241 IIB shelters
4.1 Backup batteries
To enable easier transportation and setup of the Service shelters, they will be delivered
without backup batteries. The battery tray can be equipped with different types of bat-
teries (see table below). The installed battery type depends on the required backup time.
Each battery set consist of 4 batteries. If a label relevant to the characteristics of the bat-
teries is delivered, the label has to be placed on the shelters door.
g NOTE
The battery type EnerSys SBS190F offers a high number of guaranteed load cycles
in combination with fast charging mode. Therefore this type is recommended for
base stations installed in areas with non-reliable power grids (frequent black-outs).
g NOTE
Whenever an AC-supplied BTS version in non-operational state is disconnected
from external power supply, i.e. during storage/transport or service & maintenance,
Supplie and battery
name
BATTPACK type MK:BATTPACK type Capacity
Excide A412/85 BATTPACK_23V1 * MK:BATTPACKV1 85 Ah
Oerlikon, 12CP80 BATTPACKV2 * MK:BATTPACKV2 80 Ah
Oerlikon, 12CP100/19 BATTPACKV3 * MK:BATTPACKV3 100 Ah
EnerSys, 12V92F BATTPACKV4 ** MK:BATTPACKV4 92 Ah
Oerlikon, 12C@2000 BATTPACKV5 ** MK:BATTPACKV5 55 Ah
MK:BATTPACKV9
Oerlikon, 12C@2000 BATTPACKV7 *** MK:BATTPACKV10 55 Ah
Hoppecke,
net.power12V150
BATTPACK_23V1
****
MK:BATTPACKV10 150 Ah
Hoppecke,
netpower12V170
BATTPACK_23V2
****
MK:BATTBACKV10 170 Ah
EnerSys, 12V155FS BATT_ 155AH **** MK:BATTPACK_P_23V2 155 Ah
Enersys, 12V170FS BATT_170AH **** MK:BATTPACK_P_23V2 170 Ah
EnerSys, SBS 190F BATT190SC_23V1 MK:BATTPACK_P_23V2 190 Ah
installation in: * BS-241 **BS-241 / BS-241 II ***BS-241 II ****BS-241 IIB
Table 29 Overview of backup batteries
112 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Shelter completion
the BTS-internal battery system must be disconnected by switching off the common
battery circuit breaker:BR33 (AD panel, Service1 cabinet).
4.1.1 Installation of batteries in BS-241 Service shelter
g NOTE
As up to 2 AC/DC frames can be installed in the Service1 Shelter, an identification
of the AC/DC controllers is needed. The first AC/DC frame is installed in the upper
position.
Dip switches at the front of the AC/DC controller are used for selecting the Slot ID.
The following combinations are not permitted: Slot ID bit 0/1 = ON/ON or
OFF/OFF
g NOTE
The capacity of the installed battery systems has to be selected at the Dip switch
rows BAT0 and BAT1 of the AC/DC controller. For detailed information refer to
ITMN: BTSE BS-241.
Figure 107 Switch OFF the breakers for battery installation
The charging mode of the battery system has to be selected dependend on the installed
battery type. Therefore the Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) with an appropriate
software load has to be connected with the RS 232 interface of the DCBCCTRL.
The following table gives information about the correct selection.
Slot ID bit 0 Slot ID bit 1
upper frame (AC/DC 0) ON OFF
lower frame (AC/DC 1) OFF ON
Table 30 Selection of Slot ID
!
WARNING
Before starting the installation of the battery sets, switch OFF the breakers as shown in
the figure below.
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

113
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter completion
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
g NOTE
The battery type Oerlicon 12C@2000 and 12CP70 comply to Hawker/Power Safe-
charging mode and not to charging mode of Oerlicon (CP80 & CP10).
4.1.1.1 Installation of battery type Excide
Install and connect the backup batteries Excide (formerly Sonnenschein) in accor-
dance with Figure 108 and Figure 109:
1. Put on the battery 2 and 3 into the battery tray.
2. Connect the short cable with battery 2 (- terminal) and battery 3 (+ terminal).
3. Connect one of the long cables at battery 2 (+ terminal) and battery 3 (- terminal).
4. Move battery 2 and 3 as far as stop to the rear side of the battery tray.
5. Put on battery 1 and 4 into the tray.
6. Connect the long cable coming from battery 2 (+ terminal) at battery 1 (- terminal)
and connect the long cable coming from battery 3 (- terminal) at battery 4 (+ termi-
nal).
7. Connect the blue load-cable to battery 4 (- terminal) and the black load-cable and
the tempresistor cable to battery 1 (+ terminal). Close and tighten both fixing straps.
Figure 108 Battery tray with backup batteries type Excide
battery type charging mode to be selected
Excide A412/85 select Sonnenschein
Oerlicon CP100 select Oerlicon
Oerlicon CP 80 select Oerlicon
Oerlicon 12C@2000 select Power Safe
Oerlicon CP70 select Power Safe
Hawker 12V92F select Power Safe
Table 31 Battery charging modes
114 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Shelter completion
Figure 109 Connection of backup batteries type Excide
1. Tighten the battery nuts to 20 Nm.
2. Turn up the protection cap to the end position, during tighten the cables to the
battery terminals (to avoid short circuits).
3. Adjust the battery capacity with the Dip-switches of the AC/DC controller.
Figure 110 shows the pre-manufactured parts of the battery air vent system. For setup
proceed in accordance with the figure in steps as follows:
1. Attach a plastic angle (1) to the air outlet of each battery.
2. Fix one of the 4 clear plastic tubes (2) at each angle.
3. Connect the tubes of battery 2 and 3 with the T-collector (3).
4. Connect the tubes of battery 1 and 4 with cross-collector (4).
5. Connect the T-collector and the cross-collector with the short plastic tube (5).
6. Attach the long clear plastic tube (6) at the cross-collector.
7. Route the tube down through the cable feeding modules of the EMI- and IP panel
outside the shelter.
The second T-collector (8) will be used for connecting the air vent system of a second
battery tray. The outlet nipple (7) is not needed for BS-241 battery air vent system.
g NOTE
!
CAUTION
Use only insulated tools for connecting the cables at the battery terminals in order to
avoid accidential short circuits.
+
+
+ +
1
2 3
4
- 48 V (blue)
+ 0 V (black)
tempresistor cable
(color as shown not relevant)
air vent tube (routed via EMI and IP panel outside the shelter)
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

115
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter completion
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
In order to avoid the accumulation of hydrogen gas, please make sure to install the
ventilation tube parts in a straight line and as short as possible, without any loops in
vertical direction.
Figure 110 Contents of the air vent kit
4.1.1.2 Installation of battery type Oerlikon
For installation of an Oerlikon battery set proceed in accordance with Figure 111 in
steps as follows:
1. Put on the battery 1,2,3 and 4 into the battery tray.
2. Mount the bracket of the battery tray for fixing the batteries.
3. Connect the + terminal of battery 1 and the - terminal of battery 2 with the short metal
bridge.
4. Connect the following batteries in the same way.
5. Connect the blue load-cable to battery 1 (- terminal) and the black load-cable and
the tempresistor cable to battery 4 (+ terminal).
6. Connect the blue load-cable to battery 1 (- terminal) and the black load-cable and
the tempresistor cable to battery 4 (+ terminal).
7. Tighten the cable termination fixing screws to a torque of 20 Nm.
8. Tighten the battery termination fixing screws to a torque of 6 Nm.
9. Turn up the protection cap to the end position, during tighten the cables to the
battery terminals (avoid contact of metal).
10. Adjust the battery capacity at the AC/DC controller.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
!
CAUTION
Use only insulated tools for connecting the cables at the battery terminals in order to
avoid accidential short circuits.
116 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Shelter completion
Figure 111 Connection of backup batteries (Co. Oerlikon)
After all electrical connections are complete, setup the air vent system:
1. Fix the short clear plastic tubes (1) at the air vent nipples of battery 2, 3 and 4.
2. Fix the longer plastic tubes (2) at the air vent nipples of battery 1.
3. Connect the 4 tubes at the T-collectors (3) and connect them with tubes (4).
4. Connect the long clear plastic tube (5) at the collector part.
5. Route the tube (5) to the gas exhaust tube, located at the upper rear of the shelter.
g NOTE
In order to avoid the accumulation of hydrogen gas, install the ventilation tube parts
in a straight line and as short as possible, without any loops in vertical direction.
Assure that the tubing is always fully inserted onto the different nipples and does not
sag below the battery level.
4.1.1.3 Installation of battery type EnerSys / Hawker
For installation of an EnerSys (formerly Hawker) battery set proceed in accordance
with Figure 112 and Figure 113 in steps as follows:
1. Switch OFF the relevant circuit breakers at AC/DC (BS-241 - Service1) or of ADP
(BS-241II - Service1A) and mounting kit battery (Service1A / Service2).
2. Put on the battery 1,2,3 and 4 into the battery tray (see Figure 112).
3. Fix the batteries with the bracket (part of the mounting kit MK:Battery) in the battery
tray (see Figure 112).
4. Connect the + terminal of battery 1 and the - terminal of battery 2 with the short metal
bridge and tighten the nuts with a torque of 5 Nm (see Figure 113).
5. Connect the following batteries in the same way.
+
-
+ + +
- - -
- 48 V (blue) 0 V (black)
temperature sensor
cable
air venting tubes
to MK: Battery
to F:ACDC
1 2
3 4
1
2
3
4
5
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

117
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter completion
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
6. Connect the blue load-cable to battery 1 (- terminal) and the black load-cable and
the tempresistor cable to battery 4 (+ terminal).
7. Tighten the battery termination fixing screws to a torque of 5 Nm, (see Figure 113).
8. Tighten the cable termination fixing screws to a torque of 5 Nm.
Turn up the protection cap to the end position, during tighten the cables to the battery
terminals.
Figure 112 Setup of the batteries, fixing of the tray bracket
Figure 113 Connection between the batteries, battery cable connection
!
CAUTION
Use only insulated tools for connecting the cables at the battery terminals in order to
avoid accidential short circuits.
1 2 3 4
bracket
blue black
tempresistor cable
118 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Shelter completion
Figure 114 Routing of the air vent tubes
After all electrical connections are complete, setup the air vent system according to
Figure 114:
1. Fix short clear plastic tubes (1) at the air vent nipples of battery 2,3 and 4.
2. Fix the longer plastic tubes (2) at the air vent nipple of battery 1.
3. Connect the 4 tubes with the T-collector parts (3).
4. Connect the long clear plastic tube (4) at the T-collector part of battery 4.
5. Route the tube without sagging down through the cable feeding modules of the EMI-
and IP panel outside the shelter.
g NOTE
In order to avoid the accumulation of hydrogen gas, please make sure to install the
ventilation tube parts in a straight line and as short as possible, without any loops in
vertical direction.
4.1.2 Installation of batteries in BS-241 II Service shelters
The battery back-up time can be extended by the installation of additional battery sets.
A battery set consist of 4 batteries, mounted in a common battery tray. A Service2
shelter can be equipped with up to 3 battery trays.
The Service 1A shelter can be euipped with maximum 2 battery trays. In this case no
space is provided for the installation of link equipment.
All battery sets are connected in parallel with the battery terminals at the AD-panel in the
Service1A shelter.
Battery cable kits are used for the connections between the battery sets and the con-
nection with the AD-panel.
For further information refer to the section Battery cabling between the Shelters
(BS-241II).
1
2
3
4
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

119
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter completion
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
4.1.2.1 Installation example with battery type EnerSys
Figure 115 Switch OFF the battery breakers
1. Unscrew the MK:BATTERY from the battery tray. Use a Torx driver T30.
2. Put on the battery 1,2,3 and 4 into the battery tray.
3. Mount the removed MK:BATTERY in its original position.
4. Connect the + terminal of battery 1 and the - terminal of battery 2 with the short metal
bridge and tighten the nuts with a torque of 5 Nm.
5. Connect the following batteries in the same way.
6. Shift the protection caps onto both battery cables.
7. Connect the blue load-cable no. 141/1 to battery 1 (- terminal) and the black load-
cable no.141/2 to battery 4 (+ terminal).
8. Tighten the nuts.
9. Shift the protection caps onto the battery terminals.
!
WARNING
Switch OFF the battery breakers at the AD-panel and at the MK:BATTERY before
starting the battery installation works.
!
WARNING
Use only insulated tools for connecting the cables at the battery terminals in order to
avoid accidential short circuits.
120 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Shelter completion
Figure 116 Removal of the MK:BATTERY, battery numbering
An example for the cabling of a battery set and the connections between the battery sets
in a Service2 shelter is displayed in Figure 119.
If the Service shelters battery trays are equipped with MK:BATTFIXCB, before setup of
the batteries, the spacer strips (1) have to be placed at the rear and the front edge of the
battery tray. Additional spacer blocks (2) are used to provide a distance of 10 mm
between the batteries (see following figure).
Figure 117 Parts for battery fixing of MK:BATTFIXCB
Figure 118 Position of the spacer strips
Setup the batteries as follows:
1 2 3 4
unscrew
1
2
spacer strips
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

121
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter completion
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
1. Remove the MK:BATTERY from the battery tray.
2. Insert the four spacer strips as shown in the figure above.
3. Fix the spacer blocks at battery 2, 3, 4.
4. Position the batteries in the battery tray.
5. Mount the MK:BATTERY in its original
6. Setup the battery cabling as described.
An example for the cabling of a battery set and the connections between the battery sets
in a Service2 shelter is displayed in the following figure.
Figure 119 Example of battery cabling in a Service2 shelter
After all electrical connections are completed, setup the air vent system according to the
figure above:
1. Fix the short clear plastic tubes (1) at the air vent nipples of battery 2,3 and 4.
2. Fix the longer plastic tubes (2) at the air vent nipple of battery 1.
3. Connect the 4 tubes with the T-collector parts (3).
to AD-panel in Service1A (419 1/2)
140/1
140/2
141/1
141/2
or
or
419/1
419/2
422/1
422/2
- 48 V
+ 0 V
1
2
3
4
+ 0 V
or MK:BATTERY in Service1A (422 1/2)
122 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Shelter completion
4. Connect the clear plastic tube (4),routed downwards from air outlet nipple in the rear
shelter panel, at the T-collector of battery 4.
The MK:BATTERY has to be connected with the DC input terminals of the AD-panel.
The pre-fabricated cables have to be attached to the + pole and the- pole of the
MK:BATTERY.
Fix the cables at the mounting bars with cable ties as shown in the following figure.
Figure 120 Connection between batteries and AD-panel in Service1A
g NOTE
If the AD-panel of the Service1A shelter should be connected with the MK:BAT-
TERY of the lower battery tray in the adjoining Service2 shelter, the cable set 419
1/2 has to be installed.
Further information is provided in the section Battery Cabling between the Shelters
(BS-241 II).
Figure 121 Connection of the battery cables at the AD-Panel ADP-2Vx
+
+
_
_
418/2
418/1
Swich OFF BR33 first
cable 517-2 or 519-2
cable 517-2 or 519-2
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

123
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter completion
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
If the AD-Panel ADP-2V1 is installed inside the Service1A shelter connect the battery
cables in steps as follows:
1. Switch OFF breaker BR33 at the AD-panel and the breaker of the MK:BATTERY.
2. Remove the cover plate of the connection box.
3. Connect the cable 517-1 (blue) at the ADP/BATT -48V pole and the cable 517-2
(black) at the ADP/BATT +0V pole (serial no. S30864-X215-A156), if a battery set
is installed inside the Service1A shelter.
4. Connect the cable 519-1 (blue) at the ADP/BATT -48V pole and the cable 519-2
(black) at the ADP/BATT +0V pole (serial no. S30864-X215-A156), if the first battery
set is installed inside the Service2/1 shelter.
5. Route the cables to the nearest MK:BATTERY and connect them as shown in the
following figure. Fix the cables at the shelters right-hand side mounting bar with
cable ties.
6. Close the connection box of the AD-panel with its cover plate.
Figure 122 Cable connections MK:BATTERY with Enersys batteries
Switch OFF breaker first!
517- 17-2
541-1
541-2
to
ADP-2Vx
124 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Shelter completion
Figure 123 Cable connections MK:BATTERY with Oerlikon batteries
4.1.3 Battery breaker alarm connections BS-241 / BS-241 II
If battery breakers are mounted on the MK:BATTERY, that provides breaker alarm
contacts, the battery breaker alarm signal can be routed to the X4 terminal block of
the ACTC-4 module.
If more than one battery set is installed in a cabinet, the alarm contacts of the breakers
will be connected in loop configuration. Therefore the battery alarm cables 462 and 463
(S30864-X211-A173, S30864-X211-A173) have to be connected at the pins C and NO
of the breakers.
It is recommended to connect the alarm cables at the terminals 18 (AL) and 17 (GND)
Enva0 of the X4 terminal block.
The cable connection at the breaker and cable routing is shown in the following figures.
Figure 124 Alarm cable connection at the battery breaker
Switch OFF breaker first!
517-2
541-2
541-1
517-1
to
ADP-2Vx
NC NO C
462 or 463
462 or 463
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

125
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter completion
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Figure 125 Battery breaker alarm cabling
4.1.4 Installation of batteries in BS-241 II Service1B shelter
Before starting the installation of the battery systemmake sure, that the battery breaker
BR33 at ADPA is switched OFFand the DCconnection to the Base and the Extension
shelters is interrupted by switching OFF the breakers BR28-30 as shown in the following
figure.
126 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Shelter completion
Figure 126 Disconnection of the battery system BS-241 IIB
g NOTE
Whenever an AC-supplied BTS version in non-operational state is disconnected
from external power supply, i.e. during storage/transport or service & maintenance,
the BTS-internal battery system must be disconnected by switching off the common
battery circuit breaker:BR33 (AD panel, Service1 cabinet)
Several mounting kits are provided for installation of battery sets in the Service shelters.
The following table gives information about the basically kit contents, including addional
kits, necessary to met earthquake zone 4 requirements.
BR33
BATT
BR30
E2
BR29
E1
BR28
B
BR27
BR21 BR22 BR23
BR1 BR2 BR3 BR4 BR5 BR6
BR8 BR9
ACTC
HEATER
S1 S2
BR1 BR2 BR3 BR4 BR5 BR6
BR8 BR9
ACTC
HEATER
S1 S2
switch OFF to disconnect internal battery system
switch OFF breaker for DC circuit of the TMB
ADPA of Service1B shelter
ACTCS
switch OFF to de-energize Base and Extension shelter
DC panel of Extension shelter
DC panel of Base shelter
!
WARNING
To de-energize Base/Extension shelter (i.e. for installation activities), always switch off
both:
DC breaker between DC supply system and relevant Base/Extension shelter
Breaker BR08 , to de-energize TMB circuit of the relevant shelter
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

127
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter completion
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
The installation of battery sets has always to start at the bottom of the shelter. Each
shelter can be equipped with up to 3 battery sets. The use of the several kits depends
on the battery type and to met earthquake zone 4 requirements on site.
Kit name short name Content description
common battery kit MK:BATT-23V1 2 support rails, 4 bolts, 8 spring
clamps, 14 spacer, 8 angle plates
with screw and washer, bus bar with
160 Ah breaker, DC connection
cables
earthquake battery kit MK:EQ4-23V1 2 support rails, 4 bolts, 4 screws with
washers and spring washer, 8 angle
plates with screw and washer, 4
fitting elements with screws, 14
spacer, bus bar with 160 Ah
breaker, DC connection cables
earthquake battery kit MK:EQ_BATT_23V1 9 downholding spacers for batteries
Hoppecke net.power
earthquake battery kit MK:EQ_BATT_23V2 9 downholding spacers and 3
flexible battery-interconnectors for
EnerSys battery sets (excepted
type SBS190F)
battery accessory kit MK:BATT_P_23V1 air venting system for HOPPECKE
battery sets
battery accessory kit MK:BATT_P_23_V2 air venting system for EnerSys
battery sets including 3 longer solid
battery-interconnectors
battery set
HOPPECKE
BATTPACK_23V1 4 batteries HOPPECKE
net.power12V150,
electrical battery inter-connections,
data sheet and mounting guideline
battery set
HOPPECKE
BATTPACK_23V2 4 batteries HOPPECKE
net.power12V170,
electrical battery inter-connections,
data sheet and mounting guideline
battery set EnerSys BATT_155AH 4 batteries Enersys 12V155FS,
electrical battery inter-connections,
data sheet and mounting guideline
battery set EnerSys BATT_170AH 4 batteries Enersys 12V170FS,
electrical battery inter-connections,
data sheet and mounting guideline
battery set EnerSys BATT190SC_23V1 4 batteries Enersys SBS190F, elec-
trical battery inter-connections, data
sheet and mounting guideline
Table 32 Battery sets and mounting kits for Service1B shelter
128 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Shelter completion
Proceed in accordance with the following figures as follows:
1 Attach the 4 angle plates to the rear support rail.
2 Setup the rear support rail between the vertical beams.
3 Fit bolts through the holes of vertical beam and support rail.
4 Secure the bolts with spring clamps at both ends.
5 Install the middle and front support rail in the same way.
6 Push a pair of spacers onto ends of the rear and front support rail.
7 Setup the first battery onto the support rails close to the left spacer-pair without gap.
8 Push a spacer onto the rear and front support rail close to the fitted battery.
9 Fit the next battery. Proceed with battery 3 and 4 in the same way.
10 Attach the 4 angle plates to the front support rail with screws and washers.
g NOTE
If the requirements of earthquake zone 4 have to be fulfilled, the middle support rail
has to be equipped with spacers. The 2 fitting elements have to be mounted
between the vertical beams of the shelter.
Figure 127 Mounting of the rear support rail
angle plates
bolt
spring clamp
support rail
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

129
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter completion
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Figure 128 Mounted support rails with spacers
Figure 129 Fitting of the batteries (type: Hoppecke)
support rails
spacers
battery
support rails
130 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Shelter completion
Figure 130 Mounted angle plates at front support rail
Figure 131 Mounting position of the fitting elements
Continue with the mounting of the battery inter-connections in accordance with the
mounting guideline (delivered with the battery set):
angle plates
fitting elements
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

131
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter completion
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
1 Mount a connection bracket at the +0 V pole of the left battery and at the -48 V pole
of the right battery.
2 Mount the battery DC inter-connection as shown in the following figure.
3 Attach a T-fitting to each of the 3 batteries on the left. Attach a elbow fitting to the
battery on the right.
4 Connect the fittings with parts of the clear plastic tube.
5 Connect the shelters air-venting tube at the T-fitting of the left battery.
g NOTE
If more than one battery set is installed inside the shelter, route the plastic tube to
the battery set above. Finally, the battery sets have to be connected to the shelters
air outlet in parallel.
Figure 132 Battery set, completed with inter-connections and venting system
g NOTE
The figure above shows the non-earthquake variant of the battery support for the
second set. The earthquake variant requires a third (middle) support rail. The rails
have to be fixed with screws, washers and spring washers.
venting system
upper rails
132 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Shelter completion
Figure 133 Mounting of support rails in earthquake zones
Instead of the spacers as shown in the figure, downholding spacers have to be fitted
between the batteries.
Figure 134 Support rails with downholding spacers
Install the next battery set:
screws with washers and spring washer support rails
downholding spacers
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

133
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter completion
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
1 Attach the 4 angle plates to the rear support rail with screws and washers.
2 Fix the rear support rail at the rear vertical beams with bolts and spring clamps.
If earthquake zone 4 requirements to be met, fix the rails with screws, washers and
spring washers always.
3 Mount the front support rail.
4 If earthquake zone 4 requirements to be met, mount the middle support rail and the
4 fitting elements between the vertical beams.
5 Push the spacers onto the support rail. Use downholding spacers to fulfill the earth-
quake zone 4 requirements, if needed.
6 Insert the inner battery pair first.
7 Insert the outer batteries.
8 Mount the battery DC inter-connections and the air venting system as described
above.
Install the next level of the support rails in the same way. It carries the upper spacers for
the installed battery set and is the support for the next set of batteries (if needed).
If the mechanical installation of the batteries is finished, mount the battery bus bars.
Each battery set has its own bus bar, that has to be mounted at the shelters right side
panel. The parts of the bus bars are contents of MK:BATT-23V1 or MK:EQ4-23V1 and
shown in the following figure:
Figure 135 Parts of the battery bus bar
Mount the bus bars as follows in accordance with the figure above.
1 Attach the 160 Ah circuit breaker to the base unit.
2 Fix both distance screws at the mounting bracket.
3 Setup the base unit and it with both screws.
4 Fix the pre-assembled bus bar with its screws at the right side panel. Use the pre-
drilled holes.
5 Setup the cover part after the DC cables are connected. Fix it with both screws.
g NOTE
mounting bracket with screws
distance
screws
base unit
with screws
160 Ah breaker
cover part with screws
134 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Shelter completion
It is recommended, to install the battery breaker alarm cables before fixing the bus
bars. Refer to section Battery breaker alarm connections of Service1B shelter.
Figure 136 Mounted bus bars with connected -48 V DC cables
The battery cabling consist of the following cables:
The battery cables will be routed in the free space between the battery sets and the side
panel. The side panel provides lugs for fixing of the cables with cable ties. An overview
of the battery cabling is given in the following figure.
cable no. from to color factory code
01-1 ADPAV5 -48V bus bar blue S30864-X210-A149
01-2 ADPAV5 +0V bus bar black
07-1...07-3 +0V bus bar battery set, + pole black
02 -48V bus bar -48V bus bar blue S30864-X210-A150
03-1 -48V bus bar battery set, - pole blue S30864-X210-A155
Table 33 List of cables for battery cabling
-48 V from AD-panel
-48 V cable for battery set 2
-48 V cable for battery set 1
DC bus bar for battery set 2
DC bus bar for battery set 1
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

135
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter completion
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Figure 137 Overview of battery cabling inside the Service1B shelter
4.1.5 Battery breaker alarm connections of the Service1B shelter
The pre-fabricated cables 462 (S30864-X210-A142) and 463 (S30864-X211-A174)
have to be used for routing breaker alarms to the ACTCS. The battery breakers have to
be connected in row with the terminal block X1 of the AD-panels ACTCS module (see
following figure). The alarm cables will be routed in the free space between the battery
sets and the right side panel.
BATT 1
BATT 0
BATT 2
+
_ _ _
+ + +
_
+
_ _ _
+ + +
_
+
_ _ _
+ + +
_
to AD-panel
cable 01-2
cable 01-1
+0 V bus bar
cable 07-3
cable 07-2
cable 07-1
-48 V bus bar
-48 V bus bar
-48 V bus bar
cable 02
cable 02
cable 03-1
cable 03-1
cable 03-1
BATT 0
BATT 2
BATT 1
136 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Shelter completion
Figure 138 Battery breaker connections of the Service1B shelter
4.1.6 Placement of the temperatur sensor of Service1B shelter
The temperatur sensor has to be placed in the middle of the battery set. The pair of
twisted wires should be fixed along the battery cables with cable ties. The temperature
sensor is connected to the ACTCS module.
NC C NO
NC C NO
NC C NO
ACTCS, X1
8 21 pin no.
160 Ah breaker
160 Ah breaker
160 Ah breaker
cable no. 463
cable no. 463
cable no. 462
cable no. 462
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

137
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter completion
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Figure 139 Mounting position of the temperature sensor
cable ties
temperatur sensor
138 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Shelter completion
4.2 Installation of link equipment
The link equipment acts as a front end, to provide the Abis interface. Different equipment
can be used for wire or radio transmission. Which equipment will be used depends on
customer requirements.
The number of link equipment, that can be installed depends on the height of the units.
g NOTE
For connections between Abis interface in the Base Shelter and link equipment in
the Service Shelter, pay attention to the recommendation CCITT G.703.
The receive level compared with the transmit level should not be lower than 6 dB.
For the installation of link equipment, the mounting kit MK:LE is needed, that is for 19
units. The MK:LE will be fixed at the mounting bars on the right and left side of the
shelter. 4 screws Torx T30 are needed for fixing.
The MK:LE holds the customer-dependent frames for microwave equipment or the
frame for 2 NTPM, F:NT (german market only).
The installation of link equipment in the mounting kit has always to start at the top of the
mounting kit below the DC-panel without a gap, so that the airflow inside the shelter will
not be affected.
Figure 140 Mounting kit for link equipment MK:LE
4.2.1 Installation of microwave equipment
In case of microwave transmission, the indoor units inside the Service Shelter have to
be connected via the microwave antenna cables with the tower mounted outdoor units.
The following figure shows the routing of a microwave antenna cable at the cable
feeding module in the lower part of the shelter.
g NOTE
The outer insulation of the microwave antenna cables has to be removed in the area
of the cable feeding module for proper ground contact to the metal lids.
MK:LE
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

139
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter completion
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Figure 141 Routing of microwave antenna cable
Connect the microwave antenna cables at the indoor units as follows:
1. Loosen the front part of cable feeding module and take it out.
2. Feed the microwave cables through the cable feeding module forward to the front
connectors of microwave indoor units.
3. Fix the microwave cables at the front connectors of the indoor units. The connector
type and fixing torque depends on the equipment, provided by the customer.
4. Bend the microwave cables into the a position that it is able to close the cable
feeding module without any pressure and tension.
5. Insert the removable parts of feeding module and fix them in their original position.
6. Fix each cable at the strain reliefs of the feeding module with cable ties.
The next step is the connection of the microwave indoor units with the -48 VDC circuit
of the Service Shelter and the alarm lines at the spring terminals of the ACTC. Because
construction differences between the BS-241 and the BS-241 II shelter, proceed in dif-
ferent ways. In case of BS-241 Service shelters perform the following steps:
1. Connect the microwave power supply / alarm cables (S30864-X211-A57) at the front
connectors of ACTC (see the following figure).
2. Route the cables down to the microwave units and fix them at the right subrack
mounting bar with cable ties.
3. Attach equipment-specific connectors at the cable ends that should be connected to
the microwave units.
microwave
antenna cable
cable feeding module
140 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Shelter completion
Figure 142 Alarm- and power supply connection for link equipment (BS-241)
Install the DC-supply wires in case of the BS-241 II Service1A shelter as follows:
1. Remove the cover plate of the DC-distribution block at the DC-panel.
2. Fit the breakers for link equipment (can be 4A breaker, V39118-Z4005-A91 or 10A,
V39118-Z4005-A91). The number of breakers depends on the number of micro-
wave units, that should be installed.
3. Connect the blue/black twisted wire pairs (cable no. 401, S30864-X215-A39) at the
2-pole connectors X25F (R)- X32F (R) of the DC-distribution block.
4. Route the cables down to the microwave units and fix them at the left subrack
mounting bar with cable ties.
5. Attach the equipment-specific connector at the cable ends, that should be con-
nected at the DC-input of the microwave units.
Figure 143 Connection of the DC supply cables (cable no. 401)
up to 9 cables
S30864-X211-A57
frame for
link equipment
service shelter
AL15_P Wave (white)
AL15_P AL_GND (black)
DC_Wave... PUE +0 V (red)
DC_Wave... MUE -48 V (blue)
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
microwave connectors
remove the cover plate
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

141
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter completion
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Install the alarm line connection between the microwave units and the ACTC:
1. Measure the distance between the alarm output of the microwave units and the
terminal block of the ACTC module in the F:ACTC-2V1.
2. Cut stranded wires with a cross section in the range of 0,08 mm2 - 0,5 mm2 (e.g.
LI7Y 2x0,34/1,3 blue/black) to the required length.
3. Remove 10 mm of the insulation and attach the wires to the matching spring termi-
nals of the ACTC.
4. Route the wires down to the microwave units and fix the bundle at the right subrack
mounting bar with cable ties.
5. If necessary, equip the stranded wires with a connector. The type depends on the
alarm interface of the microwave units.
The installation steps of the DC-supply and alarm cables for the microwave units in the
BS-241 II Service2 shelters are equal to the Service 1A shelter. In this case, the ACTC
module is part of the DC-panel and located on the right of the link equipment breakers.
In the DC-panels of the Service2 shelters, the link equipment breakers BR01- BR06
(connectors X25F (R) - X30F (R) can be used for the protection of the microwave units.
The following graphics should illustrate the DC cabling in both shelter types.
Figure 144 DC distribution block with microwave units in Service1A (BS-241 II)
BR01
4A or
10A
BR02
4A or
10A
BR06
4A or
10A
BR05
4A or
10A
BR03
4A or
10A
BR04
4A or
10A
BR07
4A or
10A
BR08
4A or
10A
-48 V
+0 V
X
2
5
R
X
2
5
F
X
3
0
R
X
3
0
F
X
2
9
R
X
2
9
F
X
3
2
R
X
3
2
F
X
3
1
R
X
3
1
F
X
2
7
R
X
2
7
F
X
2
8
R
X
2
8
F
X
2
6
R
X
2
6
F
m
W
a
v
e

3
m
W
a
v
e

2
m
W
a
v
e

1
m
W
a
v
e

0
m
W
a
v
e

4
m
W
a
v
e

7
m
W
a
v
e

6
m
W
a
v
e

5
m
W
a
v
e

9
m
W
a
v
e

1
1
m
W
a
v
e

1
0
m
W
a
v
e

8
example for 2 microwave units per breaker example for 1 microwave unit per breaker
cables no. 401 cables no. 401
142 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Shelter completion
Figure 145 DC distribution block with microwave units in Service2 (BS-241 II)
g NOTE
Connect the alarm wires from the microwave units at the ACTC module as shown in
the tables of the sections 1.10.10 and 1.10.11.
The next step is the routing of the PCM-lines between the OVPT / ABISCON in the Base
shelter and the PCM interfaces of the microwave indoor units. Therefore the pre-fabri-
cated cable S30864-X207-A8-*-7402 should be used. The cable is used as a splitter.
It consists of four single cables with Sub D-9 female connectors for the connection of a
microwave unit at each connector. The cables are attached to a common Sub D-25
female connector. The cable will be expanded with cable S30864-X211-A112 for the
connection with the OVPT / ABISCON.
Signal Name Plug Sub D9 f
Pin No.
Plug Sub D25
Pin No.
OVPT Terminal
Pin No.
cable no. S30864-X207-A8-*-7402
cable no. S30864-X211-A112
PCM 1 - ULA 1 1 22
PCM 1 - ULB 6 14 20
GND/G 3 3 18
PCM 1 - DLA 5 2 21
PCM 1 - DLB 9 15 19
GND/G --- --- 23
PCM 2 - ULA 1 4 16
PCM 2 - ULB 6 16 14
Table 34 Pre-fabricated cables between OVPT/ABISCON and the microwave units
BR01
4A or
10A
BR02
4A or
10A
BR06
4A or
10A
BR05
4A or
10A
BR03
4A or
10A
BR04
4A or
10A
BR07
4A or
10A
BR08
4A or
10A
-48 V
+0 V
X
2
5
R
X
2
5
F
X
3
0
R
X
3
0
F
X
2
9
R
X
2
9
F
X
3
2
R
X
3
2
F
X
3
1
R
X
3
1
F
X
2
7
R
X
2
7
F
X
2
8
R
X
2
8
F
X
2
6
R
X
2
6
F
m
W
a
v
e

3
m
W
a
v
e

2
m
W
a
v
e

1
m
W
a
v
e

0
m
W
a
v
e

4
m
W
a
v
e

1
1
m
W
a
v
e

1
0
m
W
a
v
e

5
m
W
a
v
e

7
m
W
a
v
e

9
m
W
a
v
e

8
m
W
a
v
e

6
cables no. 401
A
C
T
C
,

F
A
N
A
C
T
C
,

D
C

I
N
cable no. 408 407
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

143
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter completion
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
An overview about the complete microwave cabling of both shelter designs is given in
the following figure.
GND/G 3 18 18
PCM 2 - DLA 5 5 15
PCM 2 - DLB 9 17 13
GND/G --- --- 17
PCM 3 - ULA 1 6 10
PCM 3 - ULB 6 19 8
GND/G 3 8 12
PCM 3 - DLA 5 7 9
PCM 3 - DLB 9 20 7
GND/G --- --- 11
PCM 4 - ULA 1 9 4
PCM 4 - ULB 6 21 2
GND/G 3 23 6
PCM 4 - DLA 5 10 3
PCM 4 - DLB 9 22 1
GND/G --- --- 5
GND/G --- --- 28
Signal Name Plug Sub D9 f
Pin No.
Plug Sub D25
Pin No.
OVPT Terminal
Pin No.
cable no. S30864-X207-A8-*-7402
cable no. S30864-X211-A112
Table 34 Pre-fabricated cables between OVPT/ABISCON and the microwave units
144 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Shelter completion
Figure 146 Overview of microwave cabling
4.2.2 Installation of the NTPM
In case of transmission via terrestrial lines, the NTPMs are placed inside the Service
Shelter, that is equipped with a mounting kit for NTPM, called frame F:NT.
g NOTE
It is necessary, to install a mounting kit MK:LE before mounting of the F:NT.
Each frame F:NT provides the equivalent space of 3 HU, allowing the installation of up
to 2 NTPM side by side.
The frame F:NT provides 3 interfaces:
SubD 9, male with M3 fixings for -48 V output
SubD 25, female with M3 fixings for PCM input
SubD 25, male with M3 fixings for PCM output
In case of the BS-241, the power supply cable from the frame F:NT to the ACTC is part
of the F:NT. For the BS-241 II Service1A/ Service2 shelters use the DC power cable
S30864-X216-A109 for the connections between the link equipment breakers (4A) and
the -48VDC input of the F:NT.
PCM0
PCM1
LE1-4
LE5-8
ACTC
OVPT
to ODU
EMI panel
IP panel
F:CORE
Octopus cable
Sub D 25
f
m
f
m
f
f
m
m
PCM0
PCM1
LE1-4
LE5-8
ACTC3
-48 V dc
OVPT
EMI panel
F:CORE
Octopus cable
Sub D 25
f
m
f
m
f
f
m
m
clamping block
0,08 - 0,5 mm
2
alarm lines 3)
DCP
supply lines
5)
Sub D 9
to ODU
2)
1)
4)
Sub D 9
7)
IP panel
2)
1) integral part of cabinet cabling 2) has to be pre-prepared for every site
3) pair of stranded wires, e.g. C39195-Z75-C510
4) can be ordered as an pre-prepared cable,
6)
BS-241 II
BS-241
Service Shelter
Base Shelter
Base Shelter
Service Shelter
breaker panel
1)
(Type:LI7Y 2 x 0.34/BL/SW VS)
order No.: S30864-X207-A8-*-7402 (Octopus cable)
order No.: S30864-X215-A39 (twisted pair, blue: -48Vdc, black: 0Vdc) 5) cable no. 401,
2)
4)
6) -48V
dc
supply
can be ordered as prepared cable, order-no.: S30864-X211-A112
can be ordered as an pre-prepared cable,
7)
7)
S30861-K2045-X-*-7483 (power cable for microwave module)
8) maximum of four PCM links per OVPT
8)
8)
0,08 - 0,5 mm
2
alarm lines
8) can be OVPT or ABISCON
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

145
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter completion
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
For the PCM connection between the OVPT/ABISCON and the F:NT the pre-fabricated
cable S30864-X211-A59 should be used. An overview of the cabling if the F:NT is
installed inside the shelters is given in the following figure.
Figure 147 Overview of NTPM cabling
PCM0
PCM1
ACTC
-48 Vdc
Service Shelter Base Shelter
PCM lines EMI panel
IP panel
F:NT1
F:NT2
F:CORE
PCM0
PCM1
ACTC
-48 V
Service Shelter Base Shelter
OVPT
PCM lines EMI panel
IP panel
F:NT1
F:NT2
F:CORE
DCP breaker panel
BS-241 II BS-241
1) power supply cable: S30864-X216-A109
6) see Fig.: Interfaces of the frame F:NT
1)
6)
3)
4)
5)

2) the power supply cable from the frame F:NT to the ACTC is part of the F:NT.
2)
3) integral part of cabinet cabling
4) has to be prepared for every site
3)
4)
5)
5) cable: S30864-X211-A59, can be routed also through the cable channel alternatively between the shelters
6)
PCM0
OVPT
PCM1
OVPT OVPT
PCM0 PCM1
7)
7)
7) maximum of four PCM links per OVPT
8) 2 PCM links per F: NT
8)
8)
146 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Shelter completion
Figure 148 Interfaces of the frame F:NT
Name F:NT -48 V, subD 9 female pin
0 V 1,2,6
-48 V 4,5,9
Table 35 Wiring of -48 V interface of frame F:NT
Signal name F:NT PCM-INPUT subD 25 female pin
PCM 1 - ULA 1
PCM 1 - ULB 14
GND/G 3
PCM 1 - DLA 2
PCM 1 - DLB 15
GND/G 16
PCM 2 - ULA 4
PCM 2 - ULB 17
GND/G 6
PCM 2 - DLA 5
PCM 2 - DLB 18
GND/G 19
Table 36 Wiring of PCM-Input connector of frame F:NT
to OVPT / ABISCON
external PCM lines
- 48 V
DC
cable no. S30864-X211-A59
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

147
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter completion
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Signal name F:NT PCM-INPUT subD 25 male pin
PCM 1 - ULA 1
PCM 1 - ULB 14
GND/G 3
PCM 1 - DLA 2
PCM 1 - DLB 15
GND/G 16
PCM 2 - ULA 4
PCM 2 - ULB 17
GND/G 6
PCM 2 - DLA 5
PCM 2 - DLB 18
GND/G 19
Table 37 Wiring of PCM-Output connector of frame F:NT
148 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Shelter completion
4.3 Cable connections between the shelters
4.3.1 CAN- Bus connections (BS-241 / 241 II)
The CAN-Bus will be routed in chain configuration through the shelters to collect
external and internal alarms.
Figure 149 Location of the CAN-Bus interfaces
The CAN-Bus cabling consist of connections between the BUS interface of the several
shelters, starting from the base shelter. Pre-fabricated cables with SubD 15 connectors
at both ends with different length are used (see Table 38).
The cable type is 09YS(St)CY 4x2x0,6/1,2-120 GR.
g NOTE
The bus link end has to be terminated with the terminating resistor S30861-K2047-
X, delivered with the Base Shelter.
cable
number
from
CAN Bus out
to
CAN Bus in
factory code length
245 Base Service 1 S30864-X210-A11 1200 mm
246 Service 1 Extension1 S30864-X210-A12 1900 mm
247 Extension 1 Service 2/1 S30864-X210-A13 2600 mm
248 Service 2/1 Extension 2 S30864-X210-A14 3300 mm
249 Extension Service 2/2 S30864-X210-A15 4000 mm
*) not fixed not fixed S30864-X210-A60 6800 mm
Table 38 List of cables for CAN-Bus cabling
CAN IN *)
CAN OUT
CAN TEST
terminating resistor
Base Shelter
*) CAN IN not used in Base Shelter
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

149
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter completion
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
g NOTE
The following figure shows an example for the CAN-Bus connections between the
shelters. Other cabling variants can be installed.It is important that all shelters are
connected with CAN-Bus cables in a row with the CAN-OUT connector at the Base
Shelter and that the open end of the CAN-Bus line is terminated with the termination
resistor.
Figure 150 Example of CAN-Bus connections between the shelters
*) not fixed not fixed S30864-X210-A61 7800 mm
*) not fixed not fixed S30864-X210-A63 5000 mm
*) not fixed not fixed S30864-X210-A68 12000 mm
*) these cables are needed only, if the shelters are installed with a gap in the row
cable
number
from
CAN Bus out
to
CAN Bus in
factory code length
Table 38 List of cables for CAN-Bus cabling (Cont.)
Service 2/2 Service 1 Base Extension 1 Extension 2 Service 2/1
CAN IN
CAN OUT
CAN TEST
245
246
247
248
249
terminating
resistor
150 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Shelter completion
4.3.2 SELIC-cabling between the shelters
The SELIC-cabling (CC-link bus) provides a connection between the core modules in
the Base Shelter and the carrier units in the extension shelters.
These connections are absolute required for transmission of signalling (down link) and
alarms (uplink) between the shelters.
The interfaces are located left-hand side of the lowest CU-frame in base- and extension
shelters.
For each connection 2 cables Siemens part no. S30864-X210-A2 necessary.
Figure 151 Interfaces for SELIC-cables inside the Base shelter
cable no. from interface Base Shelter to interface Extension 1 Shelter
277 Ext. 1 CU 0...3 CU 0...3
Ext. 1 CU 4...7 CU 4-7
278 Ext. 2 CU 0...3 CU 0...3
Ext. 2 CU 4...7 CU 4-7
Table 39 List of SELIC-cables
to extension 1 CU 0...3
to extension 1 CU 4...7
to extension 2 CU 0...3
to extension 2 CU 4...7
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

151
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter completion
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Figure 152 SELIC-Cabling between the shelters
278
277
E
x
t
.
1

C
U

4
.
.
.
7
E
x
t
.
1

C
U

0
.
.
.
3
(
E
x
t
.
2
)

C
U

0
.
.
.
3
(
E
x
t
.
2
)

C
U

4
.
.
.
7
C
U

4
.
.
.
7
C
U

0
.
.
.
3
n
o
t

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
e
d
n
o
t

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
e
d
Base Shelter Extension 1 Shelter Extension 2 Shelter
152 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Shelter completion
4.3.3 - 48 V DC connections (BS-241)
These connections are required for power supply of the boards in Base- and Extension
shelters and the link equipment inside the Service Shelters.
Figure 153 Location of the DC terminals
cable no. from EMI Panel S1 to MK: Power color length
219 0V
-48V
S2 / 9a
S2 / 8a
shelter S2 / 1a
shelter S2 / 2a
black
blue
900
220 0V
-48V
B / 11a
B / 10a
shelter B / 1a
shelter B / 2a
black
blue
1500
221 0V
-48V
E1 / 13a
E1 / 12a
shelter E1 / 1a
shelter E1 / 2a
black
blue
2200
222 0V
-48V
E2 / 15a
E2 / 14a
shelter E2 / 1a
shelter E2 / 2a
black
blue
2900
cable no. from DC-conn. S2/x to DC-conn. S2/x+1
220 0V
-48V
S2 / 4b
S2 / 5b
S2 / 4a
S2 / 5a
black
blue
1500
Table 40 List of DC cable connections between the shelters
from Service1
to DC panel
-48 V +0 V
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

153
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter completion
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Figure 154 -48 V DC distribution (example)
Service 2 Service 1 Base Extension 1 Extension 2
AC DC
DC-Panel DC-Panel DC-Panel
DC-Panel DC-Panel
8x
219 220 221 222
DC terminal
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
-48V +0V -48V +0V -48V +0V -48V +0V
S2 B E1 E2
EMI-Panel S1
1 2
-48V +0V
from Service1 Shelter
to DC panel
a
b
c
154 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Shelter completion
4.3.4 - 48 V DC connections (BS-241 II, AC supplied only) with ADPA
This section describes the distribution of the -48V DC between the shelters of BS-241 II
for the system functionality and link equipment power supply.
A proposal of the -48V DC cable routing from the Service1A Shelter to the DC panel of
Base and Extension1/2 is shown in the following figure.
Figure 155 Terminals for -48 V DC wires (AD-Panel ADPA)
Figure 156 -48V DC cable routing between Service1A and Base / Extension shelters
!
WARNING
Use only insulated tools for connecting the cables at the battery terminals in order to
avoid accidential short circuits.
Service1A Shelter Base / Extension Shelter
ACTC
- - - + + + - +
+ -
LE
180A
BE1E2 BE1E2
BAT
0 1
BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05 BR06 BR07BR08
ACTC
0V-48V
BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05 BR06
ACTC
0V -48V
BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05 BR06
ACTC
0V -48V
434
Service1A
Extension1 Extension2
1 2
X29
BR33
435
433
AD Panel
Service Socket
Base
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

155
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter completion
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Figure 157 -48V DC cable routing between Service1A and Service2 shelters
Standard configurations of cable connections for DC supply of Base / Extension
Shelters and link equipment are displayed in the following tables. Because the cables
have to be routed from one shelter into the adjoined, it is recommended to use the
opening in the right and left side wall.
Service2/3
Service2/1 Service1A Service2/2
ACTC
- - - + + + - +
+ -
LE
180A
BAT
0 1
1 2
X29
BR 33 AD Panel
Service Socket
ACTC
0V -48V
ACTC
0V -48V
ACTC
0V -48V
LE breaker
X10
LE breaker LE breaker LE breaker
436
436
436
402
Cable
No
from to Color Length Factory
No.S30864-*
433 / 1
433 / 2
S1/A: ADP:B
S1/A: ADP:B
Base -48V
Base 0V
blue
black
3,5 m
3,5 m
X215-A87
434 / 1
434 / 2
S1/A: ADP:E1
S1/A: ADP:E1
Extension1 -48V
Extension1 0V
blue
black
4.2 m X215-A88
435 / 1
435 / 2
S1/A: ADP:E2
S1/A: ADP:E2
Extension2 -48V
Extension2 0V
blue
black
4.8 m X215-A89
Table 41 Cable sets for Service1A to Base, Extension1 and Extension2
Cable
No
from to Color Length Factory
No.S30864-*
Service1A with DCP: LEBREAK; Cable routing S1A toS2/1, S2/2...S2/n
402 S1/A: ADP/ X29:1
S1/A: ADP/ X29:2
S1A:DCP:LEBREAKVx:x10:3
S1A:DCP:LEBREAKVx:x10:1
blue
black
0.30 m X215-A40
Table 42 LE- DC supply: cable routing between Service1A and Service2/1...2/3
156 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Shelter completion
436 S1A:DCP:LEBREAKVx:X10:4
S1A:DCP:LEBREAKVx:X10:2
S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2Vx:X10:2
S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2Vx:X10:1
blue
black
3.5 m X215-A90
Service1A without DCP: LEBREAK; Cable routing S1A toS2/1, S2/2...S2/n
436 S1/A: ADP/ X29:1
S1/A: ADP/ X29:2
S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2Vx:X10:2
S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2Vx:X10:1
blue
black
3.5 m X215-A90
436 S2/n:DCP:LEBREAK2Vx:X10:2
S2/n:DCP:LEBREAK2Vx:X10:1
S2/n+1:DCP:LEBREAK2Vx:X10:2
S2/n+1:DCP:LEBREAK2Vx:X10:1
blue
black
3.5 m X215-A90
S2/1 with DCP: LEBREAK and DCP: LEBREAK2; Cable routing S1A to S2/1 and S2/2
436 S1/A: ADP/ X29:1
S1/A: ADP/ X29:2
S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2Vx:X10:2
S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2Vx:X10:1
blue
black
3.5 m X215-A90
403 S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2Vx:X10:2
S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2Vx:X10:1
S2/1:DCP:LEBREAKVx:X10:3
S2/1:DCP:LEBREAKVx:X10:1
blue
black
1.35 m X215-A41
436 S2/1:DCP:LEBREAKVx:X10:4
S2/1:DCP:LEBREAKVx:X10:2
S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2Vx:X10:2
S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2Vx:X10:1
blue
black
3.5 m X215-A90
Cable
No
from to Color Length Factory
No.S30864-*
Table 42 LE- DC supply: cable routing between Service1A and Service2/1...2/3 (Cont.)
Cable
No
from to Color Length Factory
No.S30864-*
401 Service1A / Service2
DCP:LEBREAK(2): X25...X32
Service1A / Service2 *2)
LE / microwaves
blue
black
*1)
1.25 m
X215-A39
*1) cut if necessary
*2) DC-Breaker 4A: V39118-Z4005-A91 or 10A: V39118-Z4005-A91 is needed
Table 43 LE: DC cable routing
Cable
No
from to Color Length Factory
No.S30864-*
--- Service1A / Service2
DCP:LEBREAK(2)
Service1A / Service2 *1)
F: NT
blue
black
2.20 m X216-A109
*1) DC-Breaker 4A:V39118-Z4005-A91is needed
Table 44 F:NT: DC cable routing
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

157
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter completion
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
4.3.5 - 48 V DC connections (BS-241 II, AC supplied only) with ADP-2V1
Figure 158 16-carrier site with BS-241 II Shelters (example)
ACOM
#0
ACOM
#1
ACOM
#2
ACOM
#3
CU
#0
CU
#1
CU
#2
CU
#3
CU
#4
CU
#5
CU
#6
CU
#7 M
U
C
O

#
0
M
U
C
O

#
1
C
O
B
A

0
C
O
S
A

0
C
O
B
A

1
C
O
S
A

1
ACOM
#0
ACOM
#1
ACOM
#2
ACOM
#3
CU
#0
CU
#1
CU
#2
CU
#3
CU
#4
CU
#5
CU
#6
CU
#7 M
U
C
O

#
0
M
U
C
O

#
1
FAN#4 FAN#5
FAN#0 FAN#1
FAN#2 FAN#3
FAN#0 FAN#1
FAN#2 FAN#3
FAN#4 FAN#5
FAN#0 FAN#1
Service1A Shelte r B ase Shelte r Extension Shelter 1
DC-Panel
DC-Panel DC-Panel AD-Panel
ACTP ACTP ACTM
MSU:AC
ACOM
#0
ACOM
#1
ACOM
#2
ACOM
#3
CU
#0
CU
#1
CU
#2
CU
#3
CU
#4
CU
#5
CU
#6
CU
#7 M
U
C
O

#
0
M
U
C
O

#
1
FAN#4 FAN#5
FAN#0 FAN#1
FAN#2 FAN#3
ACTP
533
534
534
535
535
533
Extension Shelter 2
517-1
517-2
533-1
533-2
534-1
534-2
535-1
535-2
from/to MK:BATTERY
533-2
533-1
534-2
534-1
535-2
535-1
Cable no. from to Color Length Factory No.
533 S1A/ADP-2V1/B/-48V Base/DCP -48V blue 3,50 m S30864-X215-
A197
S1A/ADP-2V1/B/ 0V Base/DCP 0V black 3,50 m
534 S1A/ADP-2V1/E1/-48V Base/DCP -48V blue 4,50 m S30864-X215-
A198
S1A/ADP-2V1/E1/ 0V Base/DCP 0V black 4,50 m
535 S1A/ADP-2V1/E2/-48V Base/DCP-48V blue 5,70 m S30864-X215-
A199
S1A/ADP-2V1/E2/ 0V Base/DCP 0V black 5,70 m
Table 45 DC cable routing Service1A to Base and Extension 1/2 with ADP-2V1
158 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Shelter completion
Figure 159 DC cable routing Service1A with ADP-2V1 to Service 2/1 - 2/3
FAN#0 FAN#1
FAN#0 FAN#1
MK: Batt ery
MK: Batt ery
ACTP
Service2/3 Shelte r S ervice1A Shelte r
MK: Batt ery
HU # 1 for LE
HU # 2 for LE
HU # 3 for LE
HU # 0 for LE
HU # 4 for LE
HU # 5 for LE
HU # 1 for LE
HU # 2 for LE
HU # 3 for LE
HU # 0 for LE
HU # 4 for LE
HU # 5 for LE
DC-Panel
AD-Panel
DC-Panel
ACTP MSU:AC
FAN#0 FAN#1
MK: Batt ery
MK: Battery
ACTP
HU # 1 for LE
HU # 2 for LE
HU # 3 for LE
HU # 0 for LE
HU # 4 for LE
HU # 5 for LE
FAN#0 FAN#1
MK: Batt ery
MK: Batt ery
ACTP
HU # 1 for LE
HU # 2 for LE
HU # 3 for LE
HU # 0 for LE
HU # 4 for LE
HU # 5 for LE
536
536 536
502
DC-Panel
536-1 536-2
X29
X10
X10
X10 X10
DC-Panel
536-1 536-2 536-1 536-2
502-1
502-2
Service2/2 Shelte r Service2/1 Shelte r
Cable no. from to Color Length Factory No.
502 S1A: ADP/X29: 1 S1A: DCP/X10: 3 blue 0,40 m S30864-X211-
A172
S1A: ADP/X29: 2 S1A: DCP/X10: 1 black 0,40 m
536 S1A: DCP/X10: 4 S2/1: DCP/X10: 2 blue 4,10 m S30864-X215-
A165
S1A: DCP/X10: 2 S2/1: DCP/X10: 1 black 4,10 m
536 S2/1: DCP/X10: 2 S2/2: DCP/X10: 2 blue 4,10 m S30864-X215-
A165
S2/1: DCP/X10: 1 S2/2: DCP/X10: 1 black 4,10 m
536 S2/2: DCP/X10: 2 S2/3: DCP/X10: 2 blue 4,10 m S30864-X215-
A165
S2/2: DCP/X10: 1 S2/3: DCP/X10: 1 black 4,10 m
Table 46 DC cable routing Service1A to Base and Extension 1/2 with ADP-2V1
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

159
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter completion
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
4.3.6 230 V AC connections (BS-241)
For connecting the heaters, 230 V AC cables have to be routed from the Service1
shelter to each other shelter in star configuration. The interfaces for the distribution of
230 V AC inside the shelters are 3-pole terminal blocks.
Figure 160 AC cabling between the BS-241 shelters
Service 2 Service 1 Base Extension 1 Extension 2
215/1
215/2
215/3
215/4
214/1
214/2
214/3
214/4
216/1
216/2
216/3
216/4
217/1
217/2
217/3
217/4
218/1
218/2
218/3
218/4
1 2 3
L N PE
2 3 4
L
1
L N PE
5 6 7
L
AC
EMI-Panel S1
heater top
heater middle
from EMI-Panel
heater bottom
1 2 3
d
c
b
a
a
b
c
Heater-Connector
heater-cable at the MK: Power color
cable 214/2; 215/2; 216/2, 217/2; 218/2
(top)
black 1 (L) - 1d
black 2 (N) - 2d
green / yellow (PE) - 3d
cable 214/3; 215/3; 216/3, 217/3; 218/3
(middle)
black 1 (L) - 1c
black 2 (N) - 2c
green / yellow (PE) - 3c
cable 214/4; 215/4; 216/4, 217/4; 218/4
(bottom)
black 1 (L) - 1a
black 2 (N) - 2a
green / yellow (PE) - 3a
Table 47 List of heater-cables
160 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Shelter completion
cable number from
EMI Panel S1
to
MK: Power V1
color length
214 / 1 L3 / 7a
N / 4a
PE / 2a
shelter S1 / AC 1b
shelter S1 / AC 2b
shelter S1 / AC 3b
black 1
black 2
green / yellow
600 mm
214 / 2;3;4 3 x heatercable at MK -
215 / 1 L1 / 5a
N / 3a
PE / 1a
shelter S2 / AC 1b
shelter S2 / AC 2b
shelter S2 / AC 3b
black 1
black 2
green / yellow
900 mm
215 / 2;3;4 3 x heatercable at MK -
216 / 1 L2 / 6a
N / 4b
PE / 2b
shelter B / AC 1b
shelter B / AC 2b
shelter B / AC 3b
black 1
black 2
green / yellow
1300 mm
216 / 2;3;4 3 x heatercable at MK -
217 / 1 L2 / 6b
N / 3b
PE / 1b
shelter E1 / AC 1b
shelter E1 / AC 2b
shelter E1 / AC 3b
black 1
black 2
green / yellow
2000 mm
217 / 2;3;4 3 x heatercable at MK -
218 / 1 L1 / 5b
N / 3c
PE / 1c
shelter E2 / AC 1b
shelter E2/ AC 2b
shelter E2 / AC 3b
black 1
black 2
green / yellow
2700 mm
218 / 2;3;4 3 x heatercable at MK -
Table 48 List of AC cables between the BS-241 shelters
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

161
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter completion
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Figure 161 Location of the AC terminal block
162 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Shelter completion
4.3.7 230 V AC connections (BS-241 II, AC supplied only)
For power supply of the heaters, 230 V AC cables have to be routed from the Service1A
shelter to the other shelters.
The heaters are located in the lowermost part of the EMI protected area of each shelter.
Figure 162 Location of the heater (example: Service1A)
Figure 163 Heater AC cabling between the shelters
Heater
1 2 4 3
c
b
a
6 7 1 2 3 4 5
a
b
c
1 2 4 3
c
b
a
1 2 4 3
c
b
a
1 2 4 3
c
b
a
1 2 4 3
c
b
a
1 2 4 3
c
b
a
L1 L2 N N PE
1 2 3 4 5
257
H H
H
H H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H H H
H
H
H
H H
H
to ADP
67 67
67 67 67
67
67
Component of MK: CASH*
Component of MK: CASH*
S2/3
S2/2 S2/1
S1A
Base Extension1 Extension2
H Connection to the Heater


A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

163
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter completion
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
4.3.8 Battery cabling between the shelters (BS-241)
These cables are the connection between the battery systems in the Service shelters
and the AC/DC frames inside the Service1 shelter.
Figure 164 Survey of battery cabling

frame AC/DC 1
T1 T0
frame AC/DC 2
T1 T0
112/4
110/4
111/4
112/3
110/3
111/3
112/2
110/2
111/2
110/1
111/1
112/1
BAT3 BAT2 BAT1 BAT0
top cover
air vent air vent air vent air vent
tempresistor
cable
Service 2/3
Service 2/2 Service2/1 Service1
a b c
1
2
terminal block battery frame
T0
T1
25 26 27 28
a a a a
b
b b
b
T0
T1
14 15 16 17
a a a a
b b b b
+ +
- -
BAT0 BAT1
+ +
- -
BAT2 BAT3
terminal block
AC/DC1 frame
terminal block
AC/DC2 frame
0 V
-48 V
BAT1
BAT1
BAT2
112/2
MK:Bat
MK:Bat
MK:Bat MK:Bat
MK:Bat
MK:Bat MK:Bat
1)
1) third battery set in Service2 shelter only possible, if membrane filter is used.
tempresistor-cable
no.
from to length
112/1 S1/BAT0 (+) S1/ AC/DC1 T0 2500 mm
Table 49 List of tempresistor cables
164 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Shelter completion
112/2 S2/1 BAT1(+) S1/ AC/DC1 T1 2500 mm
112/3 S2/2 BAT2 (+) S1/ AC/DC2 T0 5500 mm
112/4 S2/3 BAT3 (+) S1/ AC/DC2 T1 5500 mm
battery cable
number
from to length color
110/1 S1-AC/DC1-26b S1/BAT0/- (-48V) 1150 mm blue
111/1 S1-AC/DC1-25b S1/BAT0/+ (+0V) 1150 mm black
110/2 S1-AC/DC1-28b S2/1 MK:BAT1 (-) 2850 mm blue
111/2 S1-AC/DC1-27b S2/1 MK:BAT1 (+) 2850 mm black
110/3 S1-AC/DC2-15b S2/2 MK:BAT2 (-) 3200 mm blue
111/3 S1-AC/DC2-14b S2/2 MK:BAT2 (+) 3200 mm black
110/4 S1-AC/DC2-17b S2/3 MK:BAT3 (-) 3500 mm blue
111/4 S1-AC/DC2-16b S2/3 MK:BAT3 (+) 3500 mm black
Table 50 List of battery cables between the shelters
tempresistor-cable
no.
from to length
Table 49 List of tempresistor cables (Cont.)
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

165
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter completion
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
4.3.9 Battery cabling, BS-241 II with ADPA
Different cable sets are provided for the interconnection of several battery sets inside
and between the Service shelters. The cable-variants and the connections are shown
in the following table.
!
WARNING
Short circuit risk! For fastening the DC supply cables at the AD-panel connectors, use
only an insulated hexagonal screw key or ratched (M6).
Cable
No
from to Color Length Factory
No.S30864-*
418 / 1
418 / 2
S1A: MK: Battery 1
S1A: MK: Battery 1
S1A: ADP / BAT0 (-) *1)
S1A: ADP / BAT0 (+) *1)
blue
black
1.5 m
1.7 m
X215-A70
418 / 1
418 / 2
S1A: MK: Battery 2
S1A: MK: Battery 2
S1A: ADP / BAT0 (-) *1)
S1A: ADP / BAT0 (+) *1)
blue
black
1.5 m
1.7 m
X215-A70
419 / 1
419 / 2
S2/1: MK: Battery 1
S2/1: MK: Battery 1
S1A: ADPU / BAT1 (-) *1)
S1A: ADPU / BAT1 (+) *1)
blue
black
2.71 m
2.71 m
X215-A71
422 / 1
422 / 2
S2/1: MK: Battery 3
S2/1: MK: Battery 3
S1A: MK: Battery 1 or 2
S1A: MK: Battery 1 or 2
blue
black
1.71 m
1.71 m
X215-A74
422 / 1
422 / 2
S2/2: MK: Battery 3
S2/2: MK: Battery 3
S2/1: MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3
S2/1: MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3
blue
black
1.71 m
1.71 m
X215-A74
422 / 1
422 / 2
S2/3: MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3
S2/3: MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3
S2/2: MK: Battery 3
S2/2: MK: Battery 3
blue
black
1.71 m
1.71 m
X215-A74
423 / 1
423 / 2
S2/1: MK: Battery 1 or 2
S2/1: MK: Battery 1 or 2
S1A: MK: Battery 1
S1A: MK: Battery 1
blue
black
3.0 m
3.0 m
X215-A76
423 / 1
423 / 2
S2/2: MK: Battery 1 or 2
S2/2: MK: Battery 1 or 2
S2/1: MK: Battery 1
S2/1: MK: Battery 1
blue
black
3.0 m
3.0 m
X215-A76
140 / 1
140 / 2
MK: Battery 1
MK: Battery 1
MK: Battery 2
MK: Battery 2
blue
black
1.0 m
0.6 m
X215-A74
140 / 1
140 / 2
MK: Battery 2
MK: Battery 2
MK: Battery 3
MK: Battery 3
blue
black
1.0 m
0.6 m
X215-A74
141 / 1
141 / 2
F: Battery -48V
F: Battery 0V
MK: Battery (-)
MK: Battery (+)
blue
black
0.6 m
0.4 m
X216_A75 for
Hawker
141 / 1
141 / 2
F: Battery -48V
F: Battery 0V
MK: Battery (-)
MK: Battery (+)
blue
black
0.6 m
0.4 m
X215_A110 for
Oerlikon
53 F:AC/DC / CTRL / X11 F:Battery, +POL, (+0V) *2) black X216-A92
*1) cut, if necessary
*2) Connect the battery sensor to the upper Service1- battery. If there no is battery installed, connect the sensor
to the upper battery in the Service2 shelter
Table 51 List of battery cables between the shelters (BS-241 II)
166 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Shelter completion
Figure 165 Example of battery cabling with batteries in the Service1A shelter
FAN#0 FAN#1
ACTC
- - - + + + - +
+-
LE
AD Panel
HU # 0 for LE
HU # 1 for LE
HU # 2 for LE
HU # 3 for LE
HU # 4 for LE
HU # 5 for LE
0V -48V
LE Panel (S2)
ACTC
FAN#0 FAN#1
180A
BE1E2 BE1E2
BAT
0 1
Service2/1 Shelte r
Service1A Shelte r
BR 33
2 1X29
Service Socket
0V -48V
LE Panel (S2)
ACTC
FAN#0 FAN#1
0V -48V
LE Panel (S2)
ACTC
FAN#0 FAN#1
422
141
141
422
140
141 141
141
140
140
141
422
141
141
141
140
140
Service2/2 Shelte r Service2/3 Shelte r
HU # 4 for LE
HU # 3 for LE
HU # 2 for LE
HU # 1 for LE
HU # 0 for LE
LE-Panel
HU # 5 for LE
418
HU # 5 for LE
FAN#0 FAN#1
ACTC
- - - + + + - +
+-
LE
AD Panel
HU # 1 for LE
HU # 2 for LE
HU # 3 for LE
HU # 4 for LE
HU # 5 for LE
0V -48V
LE Panel (S2)
ACTC
FAN#0 FAN#1
180A
BE1E2 BE1E2
BAT
0 1
Service2/1 Shelte r
Service1A Shelte r
BR 33
2 1X29
Service Socket
0V -48V
LE Panel (S2)
ACTC
FAN#0 FAN#1
0V -48V
LE Panel (S2)
ACTC
FAN#0 FAN#1
422
141
141
422
141
141
140
140
141
422
141
141
141
140
140
Service2/2 Shelte r Service2/3 Shelte r
HU # 0 for LE
418
141
140
HU # 6 for LE
HU # 7 for LE
HU # 11 for LE
HU # 8 for LE
HU # 9 for LE
HU # 10 for LE
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

167
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter completion
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Figure 166 Circuit diagram with batteries in the Service1A shelter
Figure 167 Example of battery cabling without batteries in the Service1A shelter
BR 160A
MK:BATTERY
Service1A Shelter
BR 160A
B
A
B
R
3
3
1
8
0
A
200A
0V -48V
AD Panel
BAT

53
MK:BATTERY
Service2/3 Shelter
BR 160A
MK:BATTERY
Service2/1 Shelter
BR 160A
MK:BATTERY
Service2/2 Shelter
422/1 422/1 422/1
422/2 422/2
422/2
418/1
418/2
60 mV
FAN#0 FAN#1
ACTC
- - - + + + - +
+ -
LE
AD Panel
HU # 0 for LE
0V -48V
LE Panel (S2)
ACTC
FAN#0 FAN#1
180A
BE1E2 BE1E2
BAT
0 1
Service2/1 Shelte r
Service1A Shelte r
BR 33
2 1X29
Service Socket
0V -48V
LE Panel (S2)
ACTC
FAN#0 FAN#1
0V -48V
LE Panel (S2)
ACTC
FAN#0 FAN#1
141
422
140
141 141
141
140
140
141
422
141
141
141
140
140
Service2/2 Shelte r Service2/3 Shelte r
HU # 4 for LE
HU # 3 for LE
HU # 2 for LE
HU # 1 for LE
HU # 0 for LE
LE-Panel
HU # 5 for LE
HU # 6 for LE
HU # 7 for LE
HU # 8 for LE
HU # 9 for LE
HU # 10 for LE
HU # 11 for LE
419
141
140
168 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Shelter completion
Figure 168 Circuit diagram without batteries in the Service1A shelter
Figure 169 Overview of battery breakers for battery sets in the Service1A / Service2
shelter
Service1A Shelter
BR 160A
B
A
B
R
3
3
1
8
0
A
200A
0V -48V
AD Panel
BAT

53
MK:BATTERY
Service2/3 Shelter
BR 160A
MK:BATTERY
Service2/1 Shelter
BR 160A
MK:BATTERY
Service2/2 Shelter
422/1 422/1
422/2 422/2
419/2
60 mV
419/1
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
160A
160A
160A
160A
1
8
0
A
B
R

3
3
1)
1)
1)
1)
MK:BATTERY 2)
MK:BATTERY 2)
MK:BATTERY 2)
MK:BATTERY 2)
BAT / -48V
BAT / -48V
BAT / -48V
BAT / -48V
from AC/DC system
to subsequent Service2 cabinet
AD panel (ADP)
0V -48V
s
e
t

o
f

b
a
t
t
e
r
i
e
s

i
n

s
e
t

o
f

b
a
t
t
e
r
i
e
s

i
n

S
e
r
v
i
c
e
1
A
1) battery breaker alarm line to ACTC
2) MK:BATTERY is integral part of
F:BATTERY
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
2
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

169
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter completion
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
4.3.10 Battery cabling, BS-241 II with ADP-2V1
Different cable sets are provided for the interconnection of several battery sets inside
and between the Service shelters. The cable-variants and the connections are shown
in the following table.
!
WARNING
Short circuit risk! For fastening the DC supply cables at the AD-panel connectors, use
only an insulated hexagonal screw key or ratched (M6).
Cable
No
from to Color Length Factory
No.S30864-*
517 / 1
517 / 2
S1A: MK: Battery 1 or 2
S1A: MK: Battery 1 or 2
S1A: ADP / BAT (-)
S1A: ADP / BAT (+)
blue
black
0.85 m
1.10 m
X215-A195
519 / 1
519 / 2
S2/1: MK: Battery 1
S2/1: MK: Battery 1
S1A: ADP / BAT1 (-)
S1A: ADP / BAT1 (+)
blue
black
2.55 m
2.80 m
X215-A196
522 / 1
522 / 2
S2/1: MK: Battery 1
S2/1: MK: Battery 1
S1A: MK: Battery 1
S1A: MK: Battery 1
blue
black
1.55 m
1.30 m
X215-A168
522 / 1
522 / 2
S2/n: MK: Battery 1
S2/n: MK: Battery 1
S2/n: MK: Battery 1
S2/n: MK: Battery 1
blue
black
1.55 m
1.30 m
X215-A168
540 / 1
540 / 2
MK: Battery 1
MK: Battery 1
MK: Battery 2
MK: Battery 2
blue
black
0.55 m
0.55 m
X215-A158
540 / 1
540 / 2
MK: Battery 2
MK: Battery 2
MK: Battery 3
MK: Battery 3
blue
black
0.55 m
0.55 m
X215-A158
541 / 1
541 / 2
F: Battery -48V
F: Battery 0V
MK: Battery (-)
MK: Battery (+)
blue
black
0.27 m
0.28 m
*1)
141 / 1
141 / 2
F: Battery -48V
F: Battery 0V
MK: Battery (-)
MK: Battery (+)
blue
black
0.6 m
0.4 m
X215-A110 for
Oerlikon
53 F:AC/DC / CTRL / X11 F:Battery, +POL, (+0V) *2) black X216-A92
*1) S30864-X215-A161: only for battery pole with tapped hole M8; S30864-X215-A162: only for battery pole with
tapped hole M10
Table 52 List of battery cables (BS-241 II with ADP-2V1)
170 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Shelter completion
Figure 170 Example of battery cabling with batteries in the Service1A shelter
FAN#0 FAN#1
HU # 0 for LE
HU # 1 for LE
HU # 2 for LE
HU # 3 for LE
HU # 4 for LE
HU # 5 for LE
FAN#0 FAN#1
Service2/1 Shelte r
Service1A Shelte r
FAN#0 FAN#1 FAN#0 FAN#1
522
541
541
522
540
541 541
541
540
540
541
522
541
541
541
540
540
Service2/2 Shelte r Service2/3 Shelte r
HU # 4 for LE
HU # 3 for LE
HU # 2 for LE
HU # 1 for LE
HU # 0 for LE
HU # 5 for LE
HU # 5 for LE
FAN#0 FAN#1
HU # 1 for LE
HU # 2 for LE
HU # 3 for LE
HU # 4 for LE
HU # 5 for LE
FAN#0 FAN#1
Service2/1 Shelte r
Service1A Shelte r
FAN#0 FAN#1 FAN#0 FAN#1
522
541
541
522
541
541
540
540
541
522
541
541
541
540
540
Service2/2 Shelte r Service2/3 Shelte r
HU # 0 for LE
541
540
HU # 6 for LE
HU # 7 for LE
HU # 11 for LE
HU # 8 for LE
HU # 9 for LE
HU # 10 for LE
517
517
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

171
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter completion
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Figure 171 Circuit diagram with batteries in the Service1A shelter
Figure 172 Circuit diagram without batteries in the Service1A shelter
BR 160A
MK:BATTERY
Service1A Shelter
BR 160A
B
A
B
R
3
3
1
8
0
A
200A
0V -48V
AD Panel
BAT

53
MK:BATTERY
Service2/3 Shelter
BR 160A
MK:BATTERY
Service2/1 Shelter
BR 160A
MK:BATTERY
Service2/2 Shelter
522/1 522/1 522/1
522/2 522/2
522/2
517/1
517/2
60 mV
Service1A Shelter
BR 160A
B
A
B
R
3
3
1
8
0
A
200A
0V -48V
AD Panel
BAT

53
MK:BATTERY
Service2/3 Shelter
BR 160A
MK:BATTERY
Service2/1 Shelter
BR 160A
MK:BATTERY
Service2/2 Shelter
522/1 522/1
522/2 522/2
519/2
60 mV
519/1
172 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Shelter completion
Figure 173 Overview of battery breakers for battery sets in the Service1A / Service2
shelter
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
160A
160A
160A
160A
1
8
0
A
B
R

3
3
1)
1)
1)
1)
MK:BATTERY 2)
MK:BATTERY 2)
MK:BATTERY 2)
MK:BATTERY 2)
BAT / -48V
BAT / -48V
BAT / -48V
BAT / -48V
from AC/DC system
to subsequent Service2 cabinet
AD panel (ADP)
0V -48V
s
e
t

o
f

b
a
t
t
e
r
i
e
s

i
n

s
e
t

o
f

b
a
t
t
e
r
i
e
s

i
n

S
e
r
v
i
c
e
1
A
1) battery breaker alarm line to ACTC
2) MK:BATTERY is integral part of
F:BATTERY
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
2
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

173
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter completion
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
4.4 Extension of BS-241 with BS-241 II shelters
The mechanical connection between the BS-241 shelter and the BS-241 II shelter will
be carried out as described in section EMC/IP Connection of the BS-241 with
BS-241 II Shelters.
The EMC/IP connection kit S3086-K4148-X has to be used for the connection between
both shelter types.
4.4.1 -48 V DC connections between the shelters
If an already installed BS-241 should be extended with BS-241 II shelters (mixed
configuration), the -48 V DC cabling has to be routed as shown in the example below.
4 wire pairs are provided to connect the BS-241 Service1 shelter with the BS-241 II
Extension and Service2 shelters.
Figure 174 -48 V DC connections between BS-241 / BS-241 II shelters (example)
DC
DC-Panel
8x
220
DC terminal
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
-48V +0V - 48V +0V -48V +0V - 48V +0V
to S2 B E1 E2
EMI-Panel S1
1 2
-48V +0V
from Service1 Shelter
to DC panel
a
b
c
BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05 BR06
0V-48V
Extension1
435
2x
use cable 220/M in case
of BS-241 II shelter
219/M
222/M
to Extension2 if installed
223
to Service2/2
if installed
Base Service1 Service2/1
BS-241 II BS-241 II BS-241
DC-Panel
BS-241
221/M
174 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Shelter completion
No. From
EMI-Panel S1
To
DC-Connector
Color Factory no.
S30864-
Length
(mm)
219 /M 0 V
-48 V
9a
8a
S2/1: DCP: X10/ 0V
S2/1: DCP: X10/ -48 V
black
blue
X211-A159 2500
220 /M 0 V
-48 V
11a
10a
Base: DCP: R-2B/ 0V
Base: DCP: R-2B/ -48 V
black
blue
X211-A160 2500
221 /M 0 V
-48 V
13a
12a
Ext.1: DCP: X10/ 0V
Ext.1: DCP: X10/ -48 V
black
blue
X211-A161 3500
222 /M 0 V
-48 V
15a
14a
Ext.2: DCP: X10/ 0V
Ext.2: DCP: X10/ -48 V
black
blue
X211-A162 4500
223 /M 0 V
-48 V
S2/1: DCP: X10/ 0V
S2/1: DCP: X10/ -48 V
S2/2: DCP: X10/ 0V
S2/2: DCP: X10/ -48 V
black
blue
X211-A162 4500
223 /M 0 V
-48 V
S2/2: DCP: X10/ 0V
S2/2: DCP: X10/ -48 V
S2/3: DCP: X10/ 0V
S2/3: DCP: X10/ -48 V
black
blue
X211-A162 4500
Table 53 DC-cables for BS-241 / BS-241 II shelter extension
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

175
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter completion
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
4.4.2 230 V AC connections between the shelters
In case of the extension of a BS-241 with BS-241 II shelters, it is necessary to route the
230 V AC from the Service1 shelter to the AC clamping blocks in the Extension /
Service2 shelters that should be added.
For this purpose extend the clamping blocks for the heater connection in the BS-241
shelters with the mounting kit S30864-X215-A12. This is required to provide a fifth con-
nection possibility for the AC cable, that should be routed into the adjoining BS-241 II
shelter.
Figure 175 Heater AC cabling between BS-241 and BS-241 II
Service 2/ 1 Service 1
Base Extensi on 1 Extensi on 2
215/1
214/1
214/2
214/3
214/4
216/1
216/2
216/3
216/4
2 3 4
L L N PE
2 3 4
L
1
L N PE
5 6 7
L
AC
EMI-Panel S1
1 2 3
d
c
b
a
a
b
c
Heater-Connector
216/2
216/3
216/4
to Service 2/2 if used
67
67
67
1 2 3
L N PE
216/2
216/3
215/1
216/4
d
c
b
a
1
L
2
N
3
PE
to Service 2/2
1 2 3
L N PE
216/2
216/3
216/1
216/4
d
c
b
a
1
L
2
N
3
PE
67 67
1
to heater

expanded
clamping block
expanded
clamping block
BS-241 BS-241 BS-241 BS-241 II BS-241 II
DC-Panel
BS-241
DC-Panel DC-Panel
67
to
Extension 2
176 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Shelter completion
4.4.3 Battery cabling between the shelters
The battery backup time of an already installed BS-241 shelters can be extended with
additional battery sets inside BS-241 II shelters (mixed configuration).
In addition to the battery kits that will be used for connections between the battery sets
and connection of the battery sets with the AC/DC frames (BS-240) or with the AD-Panel
(BS-241 II), cable kits are provided for the connection of BS-241 II Service2 shelters with
the AC/DC frames in the BS-241 Service1 shelter.
Figure 176 Example of battery cabling with BS-241 and BS-241 II Service shelters
Cable no. From To Factory no.
S30864-
Length
(mm)
Color
110/1/M
111/1/M
S1/F:AC/DC1-26b
S1/F:AC/DC1-25b
S1 BAT0 with MK:BAT (-)
S1 BAT0 with MK:BAT (+)
X211-A146 1300 blue
black
110/2/M
111/2/M
S1/F:AC/DC1-28b
S1/F:AC/DC1-27b
S2/1 BAT1 with MK:BAT (-)
S2/1 BAT1 with MK:BAT (+)
X211-A147 3300 blue
black
110/3/M
111/3/M
S1/F:AC/DC2-15b
S1/F:AC/DC2-14b
S2/2 BAT2 with MK:BAT (-)
S2/2 BAT2 with MK:BAT (+)
X211-A148 3700 blue
black
110/4/M
111/4/M
S1/F:AC/DC1-17b
S1/F:AC/DC1-16b
S2/3 BAT3 with MK:BAT (-)
S2/3 BAT3 with MK:BAT (+)
X211-A149 4600 blue
black
Table 54 Battery cable kits for connections between BS-241 and BS-241 II Service shelters
FAN#0 FAN#1
HU # 5 for LE
HU # 0 for LE
HU # 1 for LE
HU # 2 for LE
HU # 3 for LE
FAN#0 FAN#1
Service2/1 Shelte r
Service1 Shelte r
0V -48V
LE Panel (S2)
ACTC
FAN#0 FAN#1
0V -48V
LE Panel (S2)
ACTC
FAN#0 FAN#1
141 141
141
140
140
141
422
141
141
141
140
140
Service2/2 Shelte r Service2/3 Shelte r
HU # 4 for LE
FAN#0 FAN#1
F:AC/DC 1
F:AC/DC 2
110/1
111/1
168
166
166
166
168
168
BAT 0
182 181
110/2
111/ 2
110/2
111/2
110/3M
111/3M
110/3M
111/3M
110/4M
111/4M
110/4M
111/4M
LE-Panel
BAT1
BAT1
BAT3
BAT3
BAT3
BAT2
BAT2
BAT2
BS-241 Service1 BS-241 Service2 BS-241 II Service2 BS-241 II Service2
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

177
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter completion
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Figure 177 Battery cable 110/*/M and 111/*/M
Connect the battery sets with the corresponding AC/DC frame as follows
1. Connect the wire 110/*/M (blue) at the -48 V terminal and the 111/*/M wire (black)
at the +0 V terminal of the MK:BATTERY as described in section 2.11.3.
2. Tighten the connection with torque wrench SW13 to 15 Nm.
3. Attach the cable lug of the tempresistor cable 112/* to the + pole of the battery set.
4. Route the wires through the shelter interconnection holes the Service1 shelter.
5. Remove the cover plate of the AC/DC frame.
6. Insert the wires into the matching clamping terminals of AC/DC frame 1 or 2 in accor-
dance with Figure 178.
7. Plug-in the tempresistor cables at the sockets T0 and T1 (see Table 55).
Figure 178 Terminal for battery cabling at F:AC/DC
connection with F:AC/DC
Connection with MK:Battery
precutted
in the factory
Cable no. from to Factory no. length
112/1 Service1, BAT 0 (+) Service1 AC/DC 1, T 0 S30864-X210-A51 2500 mm
112/2 Service2/1, BAT 1 (+) Service1 AC/DC 1, T 1 S30864-X210-A51 2500 mm
112/3 Service2/2, BAT 2 (+) Service1 AC/DC 2, T 0 S30864-X210-A52 5500 mm
112/4 Service2/3, BAT 3 (+) Service1 AC/DC 2, T 1 S30864-X210-A52 5500 mm
Table 55 List of the tempresistor cables
BAT 2 BAT3
- + - +
BAT 0 BAT1
- + - +
F:AC/DC 1
T 1
T 0
T 1
T 0
F:AC/DC 2
178 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Shelter completion
4.5 Cabling between BS-241 IIB shelters
The cable routing between the shelters requires the opening of the cable feeding
modules in the EMI and IP panel of the shelters bottom sections.
The cable feeding modules must be properly closed after the installation of the inter-
shelter cabling, to avoid the ingress of moisture and dust.
A mechanical protection of the cables outside the shelters is recommended.
4.5.1 ALARM-cabling between BS-241 IIB shelters
Figure 179 Alarm cabling between BS-241 IIB shelters
Cable no. from to Factory no. length
08 S1B, ACTCS, ALARM out Base, ACTM S30864-X210-A143 4,50 m
Table 56 Alarm cabling between BS-241 IIB shelters
BR33
BATT
BR30
E2
BR29
E1
BR28
B
BR27
BR21 BR22 BR23
ACDC0 ACDC1
ACDC2 ACDC3 ACDC4
CTRL
ACTCS
1 HU for LE0
1 HU for LE0
1 HU for LE0
1 HU for LE0
1 HU for LE0
BR1 BR2 BR3 BR4 BR5 BR6
BR8 BR9
ACTC
HEATER S1 S2
ACTC
ACTM
ACTCS, SubD25 female
ALARM cable S30864-X210-A143
Service1B shelter Base shelter
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

179
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter completion
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
4.5.2 DC-cabling between BS-241 IIB shelters
Each cable set 534 and 559 includes one 80A DC breaker.
Figure 180 DC cabling between BS-241 IIB shelters
Cable no. from to Color Factory no. length
534-1 S1B, ADPA
BUS Bar: B -48V
Base: -48V blue S30864-X215-A198 4,50 m
534-2 S1B, ADPA
BUS Bar: B +0V
Base: +0V black
559-1 S1B, ADPA
BUS Bar: E1 -48V
Extension1 -48V blue S30864-X215-A204 7,50 m
559-2 S1B, ADPA
BUS Bar: E1 +0V
Extension1 +0V black
559-1 S1B, ADPA
BUS Bar: E2 -48V
Extension2 -48V blue S30864-X215-A204 7,50 m
559-2 S1B, ADPA
BUS Bar: E2 +0V
Extension2 +0V black
Table 57 DC cabling between BS-241 IIB shelters
BR33
BATT
BR30
E2
BR29
E1
BR28
B
BR27
BR21 BR22 BR23
ACDC0 ACDC1
ACDC2 ACDC3 ACDC4
CTRL
ACTCS
1 HU for LE0
1 HU for LE0
1 HU for LE0
1 HU for LE0
1 HU for LE0
BR1 BR2 BR3 BR4 BR5 BR6
BR8 BR9
ACTC
HEATER S1 S2
ACTC
ADPAV5 DC terminals
DC cable (blue) 534-1 or 559-1
DC cable (black) 534-2 or 559-2
Service1B shelter Base and Extension shelters
MSU DC
180 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Shelter completion
4.5.3 CAN-BUS / CC-Link cabling between BS-241 IIB shelters
Cable no. from to Factory no. length
cables from Base shelter to Extension 1 or 2 (CC-Link)
10 Base, CU 8-15 CU 0-7 Extension 1 S30864-X215-A232 2,83 m
10 Base, CU16-23 CU 0-7 Extension 2 S30864-X215-A232 2,83 m
11 Base, CU 8-15 CU 0-7 Extension 1 S30864-X215-A231 5,83 m
11 Base, CU16-23 CU 0-7 Extension 2 S30864-X215-A231 5,83 m
(optional) cables from Base shelter to Extension 1 or 2 (CC-Link redundancy)
10 Base, CU 8-15 redundancy CU 0-7 Extension 1 redundancy S30864-X215-A232 2,83 m
10 Base, CU16-23 redundancy CU 0-7 Extension 2 redundancy S30864-X215-A232 2,83 m
11 Base, CU 8-15 redundancy CU 0-7 Extension 1 redundancy S30864-X215-A231 5,83 m
11 Base, CU16-23 redundancy CU 0-7 Extension 2 redundancy S30864-X215-A231 5,83 m
cable from Base shelter to Extension 1 (CAN-BUS)
12 Base, EMI panel downside
CAN out
Extension 1, EMI panel downside,
CAN in
S30864-X210-A12
S30864-X210-A14
S30864-X210-A66
1,90
3,30
12,00
cable from Extension 1 to Extension 2 (CAN-BUS)
12 Extension 1, EMI panel down-
side, CAN out
Extension 2, EMI panel downside,
CAN in
S30864-X210-A12
S30864-X210-A14
S30864-X210-A66
1,90
3,30
12,00
Table 58 CAN-BUS and CC-link cabling between BS-241 IIB shelters
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

181
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter completion
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Figure 181 CAN-BUS and CC-link cabling between BS-241 IIB shelters
4.6 Cabling between BS-241/241II and BS-241IIB shelters
The co-location of BS-241 / BS-241 II and BS-241 IIB shelter reuires the following pre-
requisites:
All cables that leaves the EMC-protected space inside the cabinets must be shielded
with braided cables screen.
The cable shields must have proper ground contact to the metal lids of the cable
entry module.
The side panel cut out of BS-241 / BS-241 II shelters at the end of the row have to
be closed with its cover plates
The cabling between the shelters is shown in the following figures.
BR1 BR2 BR3 BR4 BR5 BR6
BR8 BR9
ACTC
HEATER S1 S2
ACTC
Base shelter
BR1 BR2 BR3 BR4 BR5 BR6
BR8 BR9
ACTC
HEATER S1 S2
ACTC
BR1 BR2 BR3 BR4 BR5 BR6
BR8 BR9
ACTC
HEATER S1 S2
ACTC
Extension1 shelter Extension2 shelter
C
A
N

O
U
T
C
A
N

O
U
T
C
A
N

I
N
C
A
N

I
N
C
A
N

O
U
T
(
t
e
r
m
i
n
a
t
e
d
)
C
U

8
-
1
5
C
U

8
-
1
5
C
U

1
6
-
2
3
C
U

8
-
1
5

*
C
U

1
6
-
2
3

*
C
U

8
-
1
5

*
C
U

1
6
-
2
3
C
U

1
6
-
2
3

*
*) redundancy connection
182 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Shelter completion
Figure 182 Cabling between BS-241 II and BS-241 IIB Extension shelter
Figure 183 Cabling between BS-241 II and BS-241 IIB Base shelter
S1A Base Extension 1
Extension 2
BS-241 II BS-241 IIB
1)
AC/DC
ADPA
DCP
DCP DCP
CAN out
CAN in
CAN in
C
A
N

i
n
C
A
N

t
e
r
m
i
n
a
t
i
o
n
CAN out
CC-link
CC-link
C
C
-
l
i
n
k
-48 VDC -48 VDC
-48 VDC
1) 1) 1)
1) cable shield grounded at the RF-entry bar
2) cable with braided shield
2)
3)
3) cover plate
MSU DC
S1A
Base
Extension 1 Extension 2
BS-241 II BS-241 IIB
1)
AC/DC
ADPA
DCP
DCP DCP
CAN out
CAN in
CAN in
C
A
N

o
u
t CAN out
CC-link
CC-link
C
C
-
l
i
n
k
-48 VDC -48 VDC
-48 VDC
1) 1) 1)
1) cable shield grounded at the RF-entry bar
2) cable with braided shield
2)
3)
3) cover plate
MSU DC
CAN termination CAN out
CAN in
C
C
-
l
i
n
k
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

183
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter completion
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
cable
no.
from BS-241 / BS-241 II to BS-241 IIB length factory no.
S30864-*
602 BASE
E1 CU 0...3 connector A
MK:BUS
EXTENSION 1
CU 8...15 connector C
EMI-panel
3,40 m X215-A237
EXTENSION 1
CU 8...15 red. connector D
EMI-panel
BASE
E1 CU 4...7 connector B
MK:BUS
EXTENSION 1
CU 8...15 connector C
EMI-panel
3,40 m
EXTENSION 1
CU 8...15 red. connector D
EMI-panel
602 BASE
E2 CU 0...3 connector A
MK:BUS
EXTENSION 2
CU 8...15 connector C
EMI-panel
3,40 m X215-A237
EXTENSION 2
CU 8...15 red. connector D
EMI-panel
BASE
E2 CU 4...7 connector B
MK:BUS
EXTENSION 2
CU 8...15 connector C
EMI-panel
3,40 m
EXTENSION 2
CU 8...15 red. connector D
EMI-panel
603 BASE
E1 CU 0...3 connector A
MK:BUS
EXTENSION 1
CU 8...15 connector C
EMI-panel
6,00 m X215-A238
EXTENSION 1
CU 8...15 red. connector D
EMI-panel
BASE
E1 CU 4...7 connector B
MK:BUS
EXTENSION 1
CU 8...15 connector C
EMI-panel
6,00 A215-A238
EXTENSION 1
CU 8...15 red. connector D
EMI-panel
Table 59 CC-link cabling between BS-241 / BS-241 II and BS-241 IIB Extension shelter
184 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Shelter completion
603 BASE
E2 CU 0...3 connector A
MK:BUS
EXTENSION 2
CU 8...15 connector C
EMI-panel
6,00 m A215-A238
EXTENSION 2
CU 8...15 red. connector D
EMI-panel
BASE
E2 CU 4...7 connector B
MK:BUS
EXTENSION 2
CU 8...15 connector C
EMI-panel
6,00 m A215-A238
EXTENSION 2
CU 8...15 red. connector D
EMI-panel
cable
no.
from BS-241 / BS-241 II to BS-241 IIB length factory no.
S30864-*
Table 59 CC-link cabling between BS-241 / BS-241 II and BS-241 IIB Extension shelter (Cont.)
cable
no.
from BS-241 IIB to BS-241 / BS-241 II length factory no.
S30864-*
602 BASE
CU 8...15 connector C
EMI-panel
EXTENSION 1
E1 CU 0...3 connector A
MK:BUS
3,40 m X215-A237
EXTENSION 1
E1 CU 4...7 connector B
MK:BUS
BASE
CU 8...15 red. connector D
EMI-panel
EXTENSION 1
E1 CU 0...3 connector A
MK:BUS
3,40 m
EXTENSION 1
E1 CU 4...7 connector B
MK:BUS
602 BASE
CU 16...23 connector C
EMI-panel
EXTENSION 2
E1 CU 0...3 connector A
EMI-panel
3,40 m X215-A237
EXTENSION 2
E1 CU 4...7 connector B
MK:BUS
BASE
CU 16...23 red. connector D
EMI-panel
EXTENSION 2
E1 CU 0...3 connector A
MK:BUS
3,40 m
EXTENSION 2
E1 CU 4...7 connector B
MK:BUS
Table 60 CC-link cabling between BS-24 1IIB Base and BS-241/ BS-241 II Extension shelters
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

185
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter completion
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
4.7 Cabling between BS-241II S1B shelters
The cable connections between the shelters have to be installed in accordance with the
mounting guideline S30861-S2580-S-*-7628, delivered with the upgrade-kit MK:CAB-
S1BEV1 (part no. S30861-K2402-X).
This kit provides in addition to the upgrade-kit S30861-K2380-X all parts necessary for
the inter-shelter cabling.
The following figure shows an overview about the complete cabling between the shel-
ters.
603 BASE
CU 8...15 connector C
EMI-panel
EXTENSION 1
E1 CU 0...3 connector A
MK:BUS
6,00 m X215-A238
EXTENSION 1
E1 CU 4...7 connector B
MK:BUS
BASE
CU 8...15 red. connector D
EMI-panel
EXTENSION 1
E1 CU 0...3 connector A
MK:BUS
6,00 A215-A238
EXTENSION 1
E1 CU 4...7 connector B
MK:BUS
603 BASE
CU 16...23 connector C
EMI-panel
EXTENSION 2
E1 CU 0...3 connector A
MK:BUS
6,00 m A215-A238
EXTENSION 2
E1 CU 4...7 connector B
MK:BUS
BASE
CU 16...23 red. connector D
EMI-panel
EXTENSION 2
E1 CU 0...3 connector A
MK:BUS
6,00 m A215-A238
EXTENSION 2
E1 CU 4...7 connector B
MK:BUS
cable
no.
from BS-241 IIB to BS-241 / BS-241 II length factory no.
S30864-*
Table 60 CC-link cabling between BS-24 1IIB Base and BS-241/ BS-241 II Extension shelters (Cont.)
186 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Shelter completion
Figure 184 Cabling between BS-241II S1B shelters
The following cable connections are needed:
battery connection between the 1st and 2nd S1B shelters
alarm connection from both S1B shelters to the ACTM in the Base shelter
AC connection 230 V single phase for power supply of internal FAN and alarm con-
nection board from external power source
g NOTE
For the use of the pre-fabricated cables of the upgrade-kits, the S1B shelters must
be installed side by side with a gap smaller than 10 mm.
Prepare the 2nd S1B shelter for installation of the inter-rack cabling:
Remove the front panel of the ADPA and the cover of the lowermost -48V battery
bus bar. These part will be re-assembled, after the cable installation is finished.
Remove the blue -48V battery cable and the black 0V battery cable, that will be later
replaced with cables of the upgrade-kit.
Remove the battery breaker BR33.
Re-install the ADPA front panel and fit two cover parts in slot position of the removed
breaker BR33.
BR33
BATT
BR30
E2
BR29
E1
BR28
B
BR27
BR21 BR22 BR23
ACDC0 ACDC1
ACDC2 ACDC3 ACDC4
CTRL
ACTCS
1 HU for LE0
1 HU for LE1
1 HU for LE2
1 HU for LE3
1 HU for LE4
1st Service1B shelter
BR33
BATT
BR30
E2
BR29
E1
BR28
B
BR27
BR21 BR22 BR23
ACDC0 ACDC1
ACDC2 ACDC3 ACDC4
CTRL
ACTCS
1 HU for LE0
1 HU for LE1
1 HU for LE2
1 HU for LE3
1 HU for LE4
2nd Service1B shelter
0V-bus bar
-48V-bus bar
cables protected by flexible cable ducts outside the shelter
0V-bus bar
-48V-bus bar
to ACTM of
Base shelter
alarm cable
alarm cable
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

187
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Shelter completion
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Plug in the heater cable if applicable.
Prepare the 1st S1B shelter for installation of the inter-rack cabling:
Remove the cover of the upper most -48V battery bus bar.
Fix M4 cap nuts and bolts at the battery bus bars. Tighten the nuts by hand.
Install the black 0V battery inter-connection cable:
Connect the cable with the ring-lug at the uppermost screw terminal of the 2nd S1B
shelters 0V-bus bar.
Connect the cable with the ring-lug at the lowermost screw terminal of the 1st S1B
shelters 0V-bus bar.
Install the blue -48V battery inter-connection cable:
Connect the cable to the lowermost Rapid-Lock terminal of the 2nd S1B shelters
lowermost -48V-bus bar.
Connect the cable to the uppermost Rapid-Lock terminal of the 1st S1B shelters
uppermost -48V-bus bar.
Secure the cable with the 0V inter-connection cable together for stress relieving with
cable ties.
g NOTE
The battery cables have to be routed to the right, behind the brackets of the -48V
bus bars.
The cables have to be protected outside the shelters with flexible cable ducts. The
cable ducts have to be fixed at both ends to the lugs of the IP cable entry with cable
ties and have to be cut-off approx. 25 mm above the lugs.
All -48V bus bars cover to be re-fitted.
Install the alarmcable:
Connect the alarm cable to the ACTCS SubD25 connector of the 2nd S1B shelter.
Route the alarmcable at the right behind the brackets of the -48V-bus bars to the
IPentry.
Secure the cable inside the shelter with cable ties.
Route the alarm cable via the IP entry to the ACTM at the Base shelters EMI-panel.
Connect the cable to the matching spring terminals of the ACTM.
!
WARNING
Remove one battery connection bar of each battery set befor starting the cable installa-
tion.
!
WARNING
De-energize the battery string by switching OFF breaker BR33 at ADPA and switch OFF
all installed 160 A battery-set breakers. Do not switch ONbattery breakers before all
cable installation works are finished.
Remove one battery connection bar of each battery set befor starting the cable installa-
tion.
188 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805806a5f6f
Shelter completion
At least, prepare the AC interface for the connection with an external power supply
source as described in the mounting guideline, page 9-10.
4.8 Cover parts
All empty slots of a sub-rack have to be closed by cover parts, so that the proper air flow
inside the rack is guaranteed. Cover parts with different outer dimensions are provided.
The following table gives information about the relations between modules and cover
parts.
code number article name width applicable for:
S30861-K2019-X CP:CUV1 90 mm CU slots version 1
S30861-K2247-X CP:CUV2 90 mm CU slots version 2
S30861-K2020-X CP:DIAMCOV1 60 mm DIAMCO slots version 1
S30861-K2248-X CP:DIAMCOV2 60 mm DIAMCO slots version 2
S30861-K2021-X CP:ACOMV1 120 mm ACOM slots version 1
S30861-K2249-X CP:ACOMV2 120 mm ACOM slots version 2
S30861-K2022-X CP:COBA/COSAV1 28 mm COBA/COSA slots version 1
S30861-K2250-X CP:COBA/COSAV2 28 mm COBA/COSA slots version 2
S30861-K2376-X CP:90MMV1 90 mm CU slots, with CP:30MMV1
together for ACOM slots
S30861-K2378-X CP:30MMV1 30 mm for core slots, HYBRID6 con-
figurations and together with
CP:90MMV1 for ACOM slots
S30861-K2379-X CP:24MMV1 *) 24 mm front panel for
MFDUAMCO_VX if
HYBRID4 module is not
installed
*) CP:24MMV1consists of part C50117-A200-C841, delivered without 2D-label
Table 61 Relations between cover parts and modules
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

189
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Nonstandard installation works
Id:0900d805805c3581
5 Nonstandard installation works
5.1 Installation of the modules
For later extension or maintenance it is useful to have a basic knowledge about the
correct removal and replacement of the Core- and RF modules.
Two variants for the fixing of the modules in the subracks does exist. A lever mechanism
will be used for fixing of the Core modules COBA and COSA. Fixing screws at the upper
and lower edge are used for securing of the RF modules.The handling is shown in the
figure below.
Figure 185 Fixing of the modules (1)
Figure 186 Fixing of the modules (2)
To prevent the installation of the plug-in modules at incorrect mounting positions, each
relevant module provide code keys.
lever mechanism in open position
push together
lever mechanism in locked position fixing screw
190 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805805c3581
Nonstandard installation works
Figure 187 Location of the code key no.
Pay attention to the following hints:
1. After removal of a module check the proper condition of the code key plugs on the
backplane.
2. Before a module will be plugged-in check the correct setting of the code key number,
this is to prevent damages at the backplane connectors (see table below).
3. Insert the modules without pressure.
Module Code Key
DUAMCO 7
FICOM 7
DIAMCO 8
CU 6
COBA 1
COSA 2
Table 62 Module HW Code Keys
2
code key no.
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

191
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Nonstandard installation works
Id:0900d805805c3581
5.2 Nonstandard installation works
If an already installed BS-241 should be extended with Service2 shelters to provide a
longer battery backup time, the installation of a second AC/DC frame inside the Service1
shelter can be necessary.
5.2.1 Installation of the AC/DC frame
The AC/DC frame consist of the parts as shown in the figure below.
Complete the air duct first, but do not mount the duct before insert the fan unit connec-
tors into the fitting holes at the rear of the AC/DC frame.
Figure 188 Components of the AC/DC frame
Complete the air duct as displayed in Figure 189 and Figure 190 in steps as follows:
1. Insert both air flaps into the air duct frame, so that the flaps will be opened by the air
outlet stream.
2. Cover the air duct edges with the 4 rubber sealings.
Figure 189 Fitting of the air flaps
AC/DC frame
air duct
air flaps
front cover
192 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805805c3581
Nonstandard installation works
Figure 190 Setup of the rubber sealing
Mount the AC/DC frame inside the Service1 shelter as follows:
1. Setup the AC/DC frame in the position as shown in the figure below onto the battery
tray.
2. Open the cable ring in the upper rear of the shelter and select the fan cables no. 51
and no. 52.
3. Insert the cable connectors into the fitting holes, so that the connectors can be easy
moved inside the hole.
4. Pay attention to the correct cable no. because the connectors can not later pulled
out without any damages.
Figure 191 Plug-in of the fan cables
Install the connections between AC/DC frame 1 and 2:
1. Mount the pre-assembled air duct at the rear of the AC/DC frame with both screws
provided with the air duct parts (see Figure 192).
2. Disconnect cable 91 from the CAN-OUT connector at the backplane of the AC/DC
frame 1 (see Figure 192) and pull down the cable to AC/DC frame 2.
3. Plug-in cable no. 89 at the CAN-OUT connector of AC/DC frame 1. The cable is
provided with the AC/DC frame 2.
51
52
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

193
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Nonstandard installation works
Id:0900d805805c3581
Figure 192 Air duct mounting, disconnection CAN-BUS cable no. 91
Figure 193 Connection CAN-BUS and interconnection cable
1. Plug-in the interconnection cable no. 114 at the connector position as displayed in
Figure 193.
2. Plug-in the CAN-BUS cable no. 89 at connector CAN-OUT of the AC/DC frame 1.
3. Plug-in the interconnection cable no. 114 at the connector position as displayed in
Figure 193 at AC/DC frame 2.
4. Connect the cables no. 91 and 114 as shown in Figure 194.
Figure 194 Cable connections at AC/DC frame 2
1. Connect the CAN-BUS cable no. 89 at the CAN-IN connector of the AC/DC frame 2.
2. Lift up the AC/DC frame to its mounting position (without gap below AC/DC frame 1)
3. Fix the frame with 4 screws Torx T30.
disconnect cable no. 91
screw
AC/DC frame 1
114
114
AC/DC frame 1
AC/DC frame 2
89
89
91
114
AC/DC frame 2 AC/DC frame 2
194 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805805c3581
Nonstandard installation works
Install the -48 V DC-connections to the DC-Panel of the Service1 shelter and connect
battery systems BAT2 and BAT3.
1. Connect the cables no. 107 and 108 at the DC clamping block of the AC/DC frame 2.
2. Connect the cables no. 110/3 and 111/3 (BAT2), 110/4 and 111/4 (BAT3) at the DC
clamping block of the AC/DC frame 2 if BS-241 Service2 are used. In case of
BS-241II Service2 shelters the cables no. 110/3M and 111/3M (BAT2), 110/4M and
111/4M (BAT3) have to be connected (see figure below).
Figure 195 Connection of DC and battery cables
1. Route the cable no. 229 (twisted pair wires, black / blue) from the AC/DC frame 2 to
to the ACTC of the Service1 shelter.
2. Remove the jumper at the BB1connector of the ACTC and insert the plug of cable
no. 229.
Figure 196 Routing of the Battery Breaker Cable
Complete the installation of the AC/DC frame 2:
1. Plug in both fan units. Push down the lids (see Figure 197) during the fitting.
2. Fix the cover plates of the AC/DC frames 1 and 2.
108/A
108/B
107/A
107/B
107/ A
107/B
108/A
108/B
110/3M
111/3M
110/4M
111/4M
AC/DC frame 1 AC/DC frame 2
229
remove jumper
229
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

195
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Nonstandard installation works
Id:0900d805805c3581
Figure 197 Fitting the fans, closing the AC/DC frame
5.2.2 Battery-upgrade of BS-241 Service shelters
The mechanical and electrical preparation of the BS-241 Service shelters with AC/DC
systems from the supplier Lambda, is the precondition to integrate BS-241 II batteries.
The batterie-upgrade requires the following parts:
Mounting kit S30861-K2350-X MK:TRAYV1 (cables, mounting guideline)
Frame F:Battery Tray S30861-B4076-X
Mounting kit MK:BATTFIXCBFVx S30861-K4258-X (battery fitting, breaker)
The following installation scenarios may be possible:
Connection of a BS-241 II battery set to an unused battery string of a BS-240
Lambda-AC/DC system with frames F:AC/DC1 or F:AC/DC2, 50A battery main
breaker in a BS-241.
Connection of a BS-240 II battery set to an existing BS-241 or BS-241 II battery set,
in order to expand the battery capacity.
During the installations works, follow the instructions of the mounting guideline S30861-
K2350-X-*-7428, provided with the installation material.
5.3 Setup of system cabling
The system cabling consists of connections are installed on the front of the RF modules.
The cabling configurations depends on the different equipping variants (e.g., type of
combining, capacity stage) and the cell configuration of the site.
The system cabling is already installed in the factory. This section provides information
for setup additional system cables for the extension of RF modules or the cell configu-
ration should be changed.
press
!
WARNING!
Before starting the battery-upgrading procedure, the relevant battery string must be sep-
arated fro mthe DC_supply by switching OFF the relevant 50ADC breaker of the
Service1 rack.
A minimum distance of 20 mm between DC- and signal lines and single insulated AC-
lines is mandatory.
196 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805805c3581
Nonstandard installation works
System cables will be shipped in a box (semi-rigid cables) to avoid twisting and damage
or in plastic bags (semi-flex cables).
Before starting the connection procedure, refer to the site documentation and determine
the types and number of cables.
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

197
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Nonstandard installation works
Id:0900d805805c3581
5.3.1 System cabling with semi-rigid cables
g NOTE
To obtain the minimum bending radius of 10 mm (semi-rigid .141 AI) and 3,5 mm
(semi-rigid .86 AI). Fix the system cables at SMA connectors with a torque wrench
set to 1.0 Nm and at SMC connectors with a torque wrench set to 0,35 Nm.
connection code number path length connector cable type
DUAMCO 0/3-
CU 0/1,4/5
C39195-Z80-C113 RX 1.6 m SMC,90,female
SMC,90,female
semi-rigid
.086 Al
DUAMCO 1/2-
CU 2/3,6/7
C39195-Z80-C118 RX 1.25 m SMC,90,female/
MC,90,female
semi-rigid
.086 Al
DUAMCO 0/3-
CU 0/1,4/5
C39195-Z80-C160 TX 1.25 m SMA,90,male/
SMA,90,male
semi-rigid
.141 Al
DUAMCO 1/2-
CU 2/3,6/7
C39195-Z80-C114 TX 1.05 m SMA,90,male/
SMA,90,male
semi-rigid
.141 Al
FICOM-0/3
CU 0/1,4/5
C39195-Z80-C160 TX 1.25 m SMA,90,male/
SMA,90,male
semi-rigid
.141 Al
FICOM-1/2
CU 2/3,6/7
C39195-Z80-C114 TX 1.05 m SMA,90,male/
SMA,90,male
semi-rigid
.141 Al
DIAMCO-0
CU 1,2/3,4/6,7
C39195-Z80-C116 RX 0.6 m SMC,90,female/
SMC,90,female
semi-rigid
.086 Al
DIAMCO-0/1
CU 0/5
C39195-Z80-C117 RX 0.75 m SMC,90,female/
SMC,90,female
semi-rigid
.086 Al
DIAMCO-1
CU 2/3,4,6/7
C39195-Z80-C116 RX 0.6 m SMC,90,female/
SMC,90,female
semi-rigid
.086 Al
HPDU-
DIAMCO
(Shelter)
C39195-Z80-C175 RX 0.8 m SMA,90,male/
N-Con,90,male
semi-rigid
.141 Al
HPDU-
FICOM
(Shelter)
C39195-Z80-C172 TX 0.8 m 7/16,90,male
7/16,90,male
1/2jumper
cable
DIAMCO
Shelter 0 -
DIAMCO
Shelter 1
C39195-Z80-C176 cas-
cadin
g
2.7 m SMA,90,male
N-Con,90,male
Coax
flexible
BIAS-T-
DIAMCO
(Shelter)
C39195-Z80-C175 RX 0.8 m SMA,90,male/
N-Con,90,male
semi-rigid
.141 Al
BIAS-T-
HPDU
(Shelter)
C39195-Z80-C170 RX 0.3 m SMA,90,male/
SMA,90,male
semi-rigid
.141 Al
Table 63 Functionality of semi-rigid system cables
198 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805805c3581
Nonstandard installation works
Figure 198 Example of system cabling with semi-rigid cables
g NOTE
In case of expansion of a FICOM base module with FICOM expansion modules, a
short semi-flex cable (C39195-Z80-C137) will be connected between the RF/EXP
connectors (N-type, female) of the modules.
Tighten N-type connectors to a torque of approx. 1,00 Nm.
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

199
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Nonstandard installation works
Id:0900d805805c3581
5.3.2 System cabling with flexible cables
The cables have to be routed in such a way that allows the ease exchange of modules
(CUs, Combiners and FANs). For this reason BTS Base- / Extension cabinets which
have been equipped with flexible RF cabling in the factory, delivered with a pair of cable-
retainers fitted left-and right hand side at the bottom of each sub-rack (except the lowest
subrack of a cabinet).
Route the cables in a way,that the LEDs of the modules are visible and the test adapter
connectors are accessible.
The task of the cable retainers is to keep the flexible RF-cables in their original position
without additional fixing facilities.If a customer decides to retrofit a 1st generation base
station, that is not been equipped with cable-retainers, the flexible HF cables should be
loosely fixed with cable-ties.
g NOTE
The fixing of HF cables with cable-ties is not allowed in shelters that are equipped
with cable retainers.
Figure 199 Example of system cabling with flexible cables
g NOTE
Fix the system cables at SMA connectors with a torque wrench set to 1,00 Nm and
at SMC connectors with a torque wrench set to 0,35 Nm. Terminate all unused con-
nectors of the antenna combiners with 50 Ohm load resistors!
g NOTE
If a CU will be replaced by a FlexCU, EDGE-CU or GCU, make sure that the system
cables are installed as listed in the following table.
connection code number length Path connector
ACOM - FCU, ECU, GCU S30864-X217-A48 400 mm RX SMC,90,female/
SMC,90,female
Table 64 BS-241 II, flexible system cables ACOM - FCU, ECU, GCU
200 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805805c3581
Nonstandard installation works
g NOTE
The minimum single bending radius of the flexible cables is 20 mm.
The minimum repeated bending radius is 40 mm.
The extra length of the cables have to be stored inside the vertical space between
the subracks and the shelter. The horizontal space below each subrack should not
be used to store the extra length of the system cables or anything else. This space
is used as an air inlet for cooling.
g NOTE
In case of expansion of a FICOM base module with FICOM expansion modules, a
short RF cables (C39195-Z80-C137) will be connected between the RF/EXP con-
ACOM - FCU, ECU, GCU S30864-X217-A26 600 mm RX SMC,90,female/
SMC,90,female
ACOM - FCU, ECU, GCU S30864-X217-A27 750 mm RX SMC,90,female/
SMC,90,female
ACOM - FCU, ECU, GCU S30864-X217-A50 1000 mm RX SMC,90,female/
SMC,90,female
ACOM - FCU, ECU, GCU S30864-X217-A51 1200 mm RX SMC,90,female/
SMC,90,female
ACOM - FCU, ECU, GCU S30864-X217-A15 1400 mm RX SMC,90,female/
SMC,90,female
ACOM - FCU, ECU, GCU S30864-X217-A13 1600 mm RX SMC,90,female/
SMC,90,female
ACOM - FCU, ECU, GCU S30864-X217-A14 1800 mm RX SMC,90,female/
SMC,90,female
ACOM - FCU, ECU, GCU S30864-X217-A39 390 mm TX SMA,90,male/
SMA,90,male
ACOM - FCU, ECU, GCU S30864-X217-A49 600 mm TX SMA,90,male/
SMA,90,male
ACOM - FCU, ECU, GCU S30864-X217-A54 800 mm TX SMA,90,male/
SMA,90,male
ACOM - FCU, ECU, GCU S30864-X217-A25 1050 mm TX SMA,90,male/
SMA,90,male
ACOM - FCU, ECU, GCU S30864-X217-A24 1250 mm TX SMA,90,male/
SMA,90,male
ACOM - FCU, ECU, GCU S30864-X217-A52 1400 mm TX SMA,90,male/
SMA,90,male
ACOM - FCU, ECU, GCU S30864-X217-A23 1600 mm TX SMA,90,male/
SMA,90,male
ACOM - FCU, ECU, GCU S30864-X217-A53 1800 mm TX SMA,90,male/
SMA,90,male
connection code number length Path connector
Table 64 BS-241 II, flexible system cables ACOM - FCU, ECU, GCU (Cont.)
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

201
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Nonstandard installation works
Id:0900d805805c3581
nectors (N-type, female) of the modules. Tighten N-type connectors to a torque of
approx. 1,00 Nm. Avoid the twisting of the cable connectors during the connection.
5.3.3 Termination resistors
It is necessary to terminate all unused RF-connectors of the RF-modules with 50 Ohm
load resistors. The following terminations are used:
C39195-Z80-C30 for SMA connectors
C39195-Z80-C31 for SMC connectors
g NOTE
Fix the termination at SMA connectors with a torque wrench set to 1.0 Nm and at
SMC connectors to 0.35 Nm.
Later removal of terminations must be done with care, to avoid damages at the RF
front connectors of the modules.
202 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805805c3585
Post installation notes
6 Post installation notes
6.1 Leaving the site
g NOTE
For dehydrating the shelter during transportation and storage, a bag filled with Silica
Gel is fitted into the shelter by the factory. It is recommended to remove the bag,
because after a certain time the bag lost his function.
g NOTE
To avoid consation in the shelter because of missing of the air circulation, switch ON
the breaker BR:06 at the DC-panel of all shelters.
The following instructions should be followed before leaving the site:
1. At the end of the working day enable any alarms that should be active.
2. Contact the Network Control Center to announce your departure.
3. Close and lock the shelter doors.
4. Ensure the site is secure or hand it over to the person in charge / caretaker.
g NOTE
In order to make sure that on the BS-241 (Shelter type I) there is no Door Open
alarm after closing the shelter door, do the following:
Close the door, turn the door handle in the clockwise direction and pass over the
normal lock position (vertical to the ground) by 20 to 30 degrees, where you feel that
it can not turn any more. Then bring back the handle in the handle latch. The Door
Open alarm goes off.
If all installation activities are finished, any garbage must be cleared from site. Remove
all packing material for recycling.
6.2 Disposal of electrical and electronic equipment
The correct disposal and separate collection of your old appliance will help prevent
potential negative consequences for the environment and human health. It is a precon-
dition for reuse and recycling of used electrical and electronic equipment.
For more detailed information about disposal of your old appliance, please contact your
sales representative.
The statements quoted above are only fully valid for equipment which is installed in the
countries of the European Union and is covered by the directive 2002/96/EC.
Countries outside the European Union may have other regulations regarding the
disposal of electrical and electronic equipment. All electrical and electronic products
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

203
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Post installation notes
Id:0900d805805c3585
should be disposed of separately from the municipal waste stream via designated col-
lection facilities appointed by the government or the local authorities.
204 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805805aefb7
Appendix
7 Appendix
7.1 Installation tools
The correct installation is carried out with the aid of the following tools:
Additional tool set for BSS-installation H89999-B633
Tool set for BS-24x installation H89999-B148
ESD security tool set H89999-B635-V1
Spirit level
Tape measure
Torque spanner for SMC connectors (0.25 ft lb / 35 N/cm)
Torque spanner for SMA connectors (0.74 ft lb /100 N/cm)
Screw driver for torx screws T8, T10, T20, T25, T30, T40, T50 (length 8)
Long screw driver for torx screws T30 (length 15)
Engineers wrenches for M12, M42 (wrench size19 and 65)
Ratchet with insets for nuts M4, M5, M6, M8, M10, M12, M16 (7, 8, 10, 13, 17, 19,
24 mm)
Short ratchet with an inset for nuts M12 (wrench size19)
Tamper-resistant Hex screwhead: Hex TR 8 mm
Tamper-resistant TORX Plus screwhead: IPR-25
Tamper-resistant TORX screwhead: TR-20
Security Torx screw driver with inset IPR T25, 5-star with pin
Insulated torque wrench for Torx T30 for battery mounting
Insulated torque wrench size17 mm / 20 Nm for battery mounting
Insulated hexagonal socket screw key or ratchet (M6) for connecting DC cables to
AD panel and DC panels (Base and Extension)
Torque wrench size 32 / 25 Nm for 7/16 connector fixing
Screw drivers for hexagonal socket screw or hexagonal socket screw key wrench
size .16
Screw driver for slotted screw M3, M4 , M5
Screw driver for pozi drive screws PZ0 ... PZ4
Crimping tool (Hoffmann order Nr.: 72942 Gr. 35 or Tyco AMP order Nr.:734650-1)
Stripping knife for RF cables
Trimming tool for 1/2" RF cables
Flat brush, width 20 mm
Hot air gun or butane torch
90 offset screw driver for torx screws T20
4 lift eye bolts M12 (for crane- or helicopter transports only)
Hammer drill with twisted drills widia, diameter: 15 mm, 18 mm
Dust mask
hard hat
Knee pads (recommended)
vacuum cleaner
scissors
g NOTE
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

205
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Appendix
Id:0900d805805aefb7
Refer for additional information to the tool and test equipment database in the Intra-
net: https://tte-support.inside.nokiasiemensnetworks.com/tte/
For installation of power supply, transmission equipment, antennas, cableways and
other infrastructure equipment, additional tools may be necessary.
7.2 Ancillary material
The following ancillary materials are needed:
Cable ties in differend sizes
Wire end sleeves for 16 mm copper wires
Cable lugs M8
Paint retouch kit (order no. A500-C101-B261)
Self vulcanized tape
7.3 Technical data
Parameter BS-241 / 241 II / 241 IIB
overall dimensions (HxWxD) 1750 x 700 x 650 mm (BS-241 / 241 II)
1750 x 700 x 757 mm (BS-241 IIB S1B)
1650 x 700 x 650 mm (BS-241 IIB B,E)
weights:
Shelter (unequipped)
Base shelter (full equipped)
Extension shelter (4 x ACOM, 8 x CU)
Service1 (1 x F:AC/DC, 1 x F: Battery)
Service2 (3 x F: Battery, MEF-shelter only)
frame with 4 ACOM
frame with 4 CU + 2 MUCO
frame with 6 AC/DC
frame with battery set
DC-panel, cabling included
110 kg / 150 kg / 150 kg
240 kg / 280 kg / 280 kg
240 kg / 280 kg / 280 kg
279 kg / 312 kg / 500 kg
540 kg / 580 kg / 1000 kg
40 kg
40 kg
35 kg
130 kg / 130 kg / 250 kg
10 kg
mains input voltage AC:
input voltage DC:
3 x 230 V AC / 50Hz
- 48 V
power consumption:
AMCO
MUCO
TMA
CU (GSM)
ECU (Edge)
FCU
COBA
COSA
DC panel
AC/DC converter
battery set
25,5 W
12,5 W
9 W
150 W per module
210 W per module
310 W per module
17 W
17 W
10 W
80 W
20 W
Table 65 Technical data
206 A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B
Id:0900d805805aefb7
Appendix
7.4 Checklist for installation
environmental condition: outdoor
Abis link media: wire, fibre optic, microwave
Carrier units per shelter: max. 8
No. of cells per BTSE max. 12
no. of CU per Cell 1 - 12
external interfaces:
TX/RX antenna
Abis interface
mains input AC
ground connection
external alarms
LMT
7/16, female
terminal block (120 ) or
1.0/2.3 coaxial connectors female (75 )
terminal block (max. AWG 8)
bolt M8
spring terminal blocks
SubD 15 (female), RJ 45 socket
Parameter BS-241 / 241 II / 241 IIB
Table 65 Technical data (Cont.)
Check Item Yes No
Mounting
All shelters fixed to concrete foundation or base construction
Grounding
All shelters connected to ground as described
Cable screens of all cables connected to ground at the cable
window of the building
Power Supply
Cross section of power supply cable sufficient
power supply connection corresponded to TNS-or TT Network
requirements
Cable window of the installation building equipped with lightning
conductor
Cross section corresponded to cable length
External Alarms
External alarm cables with braided screen
Cable screen contacted to metal lid of cable feeding module
Cable screen contacted to ground at both ends
Overvoltage protection equipment present and correct installed
PCM Cables
Table 66 Checklist for installation
A50016-G5100-A390-13-7631

207
Installing BS-241 / 241 II / 241 II B Appendix
Id:0900d805805aefb7
PCM cables with braided screen
Cable screens connected with EMI panel of rack
Cable screen contacted to ground at both ends
NTPM connector for cable screens corresponded to
EMC requirements
Overvoltage protection equipment correct installed (if present)
Antenna Cables (if external antennas will be used)
Outer conductor of antenna cables connected to ground at
antenna window
Grounding of antenna cables between antenna and antenna
window corresponded to grounding guideline
Antenna cable conductor protected against humidity at the ground
points
Check Item Yes No
Table 66 Checklist for installation (Cont.)

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen